Home

XS3900-48F User's Guide

image

Contents

1. ooooooo0o uonoHJggm uu o
2. Portisolation Setting Wizard e e e e 8 2 8 2n s a se a 9 Li o o o B 48 49 50 51 52 a Ap ooO00000 o
3. Ma Y v E a v 34 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 iv iv a gt el 5 y 5 5 5 El e e a G 5 5 gt y gt El a IZ v i iv ivi AMM E i v Iv mm Be gt gt gt EE alal ca AES e 2 a v Y v v vi E E v v v AMMO a E 3 vl I V V f t e MM vi e Ta v Y 2 v v v Ivi f T v v v a v v 22 MMMM FI E v v v a FITm cca Y a Maz v E Tm E YM E tte E v i5 Maa iv Iv f E v v v a t v 2 Elem EE a El Bl 3 gt gt D 3 El El el El El gt gt 3 gt El el El bl bl
4. 244 XS3900 48F User s Guide EN Table of Contents 30 1 CP UP rection Cus BW ioa yb CEREDIARERCE RE ERE Ga b PRU o 244 30 2 Error Disable Recovery Ove 17 o C EKEREN E 244 aus The ENG Disable Oe 245 2044 CPU Protection Connora morosi Deor iu eit eR Pr QENE M PDep asian rc dbuaa nigella 245 200 Error Disable Detect COBIquEStON aida tral 246 300 Eno Digable Recovery d perro aia 247 Chapter 31 Private VLAN 249 4T Pivate VLAN OVO ON da 249 SL tod LOUER MODE sus cence fossvancebetacs coneesestannee aleccnenat iaqauniegsadesatsedaisaninid aasenandaniacamiadeomeet 251 Chapter 32 cinj l 253 g2 ao ROO AA al Saa E 253 222 Gonhig nng State PNT Gr E 254 Chapter 33 Auca E 256 22 DR ery A Rp RR eR at dta Rd 256 cow USC and PerHop Bara dali 256 331 250 Neiwer Explain 256 33 2 Two Rate Three Color Marker Trafic POMGING 1e la e iae 257 33 2 1 TRTGCM Golor blind Mode E m EROS 258 83 2 2 TRICM Lola Modo a 258 AI DAS ae Dp I TT 258 33 3 1 Configuring 2 Rate 3 Color Marker Setia usos 259 294 DSCPAc EEE 802 Tp Priory SenindS cms Eau tu cao ob Fe e Rd gas 261 ccr ws sipepel2siE us c ES 261 Chapter 34
5. 70 cms apa TD TD TTD DD Dm 70 5 2 VOI RNA T 70 CNRC S T m 0 c easier nen 72 B3 monct o VIL AIMS aca 73 CO SW SUD GOCEN raia A o A 74 Jug fo taa M I TUE 76 B C PRESA iaaa 78 A A ssanesinsasnandpnat sasanie sanded si juannasa aauaseeits annie inacadsss H 78 Chapter 7 VLAN e A cousa cee scasnsaStanuasesiearseds Ea Ae 81 KN XS3900 48F User s Guide Table of Contents 7 1 Introduction to IEEE 802 10 Tagged LANE urna ii 81 74 1 F rwatding Tagged and Untagged Frames sencilla traca 81 712 Automate VLAN Regis talion Fe 82 x A a aR E T 82 T ORP annaa mE 82 13 POR VLAN TUNK sir ER 83 e e x E PNE eem E E E E E OEO A 83 Aa gr TO Sme VLAN id 83 pes LAN SE e TEE I i i tt ee 84 Rae IE DU E ci ND D IT 85 7 5 9 Configure amp State VLAN ar Pale VLA ai 86 zd congre VLAN POLL SANOS ainia 88 Pte od VE eR FLT ac eere 89 7020 Protocol Based Ram Da cues Oia 91 LOT o Ue YLAN SIRUS ccr CT 94 PB Paarl IgM Lc i oL 95 ZB D Comare a Porsbased VLAN aus opto opea aad ard ao di 95 Chapter 8 vae MAG Forward f 99 eT OVA ep nem 99 32 COMA Siate MAC ze rip L EO 99 Chapter 9 Static Multicast Forward Setup 101 9 1 Static Multicast Forwarding OVOIVIGUW sii la 101 9 2 Contiquiihg Static M licast FOIWSIIBQ siii e 102 Chapter 10 ali Y
6. S 263 DAT DALE CARAS ra AO 263 24 1 DHCP ON HI ate ORIONE add oi sa id Etna 263 o PAP aE e e t 263 Ber REII dinn AA a 264 2428 1 DHCP Relay Agent InPSEWSION sanan 264 24 3 2 amiguita DHCP Tob REGY noia 265 34 3 3 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Exemple ccoo orion inni it id 266 244 Contouring DHCP VILAM SSMUS suda 266 244 1 Example DHCP Relay for Tea YLANS sic 267 Chapter 35 o me 269 12 XS3900 48F User s Guide Table of Contents 25 1 The Manienance SB ipa dex boat a manana nate on aono a 269 ts dt e oT 270 300 SS COMUNI Mei a aa e s Erai 270 154 EE EE RE E P LT AT 270 A 271 300 Restos a d npe al Ae a AAE 272 2 BIKIR E CONGU EON FIE A erka a A E 272 358 PUP Command LIE dais 273 29 NIRS pads COE IONS caria bia eee addo ec a R 273 35 52 FIP Commend Line Procede susan 274 2053 CUE gid Fe uei e 274 254 4 PT PRESTO anuario 274 Chapter 36 o 19 M m s 276 36 1 ARES ORIO o io afe 276 36 2 The Access Control Main SGEE rada A oca dd pora san 276 307 ADO I peer 276 25 371 SNMP And SEGUY sb 277 283 2 SIERO TEO MIES tia A 278 pl SNP Do Le OPC POE yg Vine ro cid a T odu tid a a EUER ORI RH DRE Or aene 278 36 34 CONDO SNMP cui 282 26 9 0 DONIQUTO SNMP TRA aa cc 283 PBs or COMGUM SNMP USSF c tc UT 284 2645 Senno Up Login PANTS A adnan hee aaa 285 36 5 Service Access C
7. ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name v v NAS Identifier v v NAS IP Address v v Service Type v v Acct Status Type v v Acct Delay Time v v Acct Session ld v v Acct Authentic v v Acct Session Time v Acct Terminate Cause Table 80 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Telnet SSH ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name v v NAS Identifier v v NAS IP Address v v Service Type v v Calling Station Id v v Acct Status Type v v Acct Delay Time v v Acct Session Id v v Acct Authentic v v Acct Session Time v Acct Terminate Cause XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 23 AAA 23 3 2 3 Attributes Used for Accounting IEEE 802 1x Events The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time of the session they are sent Table 81 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name v v v NAS IP Address v v v NAS Port v v v Class v v v Called Station Id v v v Calling Station Id v v v NAS Identifier v v v NAS Port Type v v v Acct Status Type v v v Acct Delay Time v v v Acct Session ld v v v Acct Authentic v v v Acct Input Octets v v Acct Output Octets v v Acct Session Time v v Acct Input Packets v v Acct Output Packets v v Acct Terminate Cause v Acct Input Gigawords v v Acct Output Gigawords v v
8. a WI ge maet e v e m emm m caf v v v 33 aaa Malal ra rca ra ag m IE eeu ca ca acacia s AMAAN e muet sg EE gt 5j Il Bi 5 El Bi El gt El b El i bl El 5 El Bl 5 B Ibl B Il Bl gt El gt Ibl gt El Bi El B El El gt El B El 5 El gt D s a a sg MEI e m m e ca a ac 3 v V v V mam E V e gm em e Y Maca Mea ca ca Mara aak BBB gt e amp e POE s v vl v V ratae E v v vi aalala Bl B Bl gt B El El Dl bl el Bl Bl Bl gt D El el el el El s meme www ed HEBE v BEBE aaa a E m 4 acc all Ara a lalala sg 5 v v v v v HERA zum ere oo BE BJ Bj Bl B 3 5 BE jaja CICI aja CIG CIC she 6 ig EMI EIEIIEIE e e e e el gt BEE BRE e ef El El bl Pl el 5 D gt gt gt El CICI CICI CIC CIC 59 ajaja a El Bl El El Chapter 7 VLAN 2 v vl VI v e amt y v iv vi emm cec v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v Chapter 7 VLAN The following screen shows users on a port based port isolated VLAN configuration Figure 40 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup Port Isolation Apply Incoming 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l 42 45 44 Minimo er e
9. LABEL DESCRIPTION VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN to which these DHCP settings apply Remote DHCP Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation Server 1 3 Relay Agent Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot number port Information number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup screen Select the check box for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group to which this DHCP settings apply Type This field displays Server or Relay for the DHCP mode DHCP Status For DHCP relay configuration this field displays the first remote DHCP server IP address Delete Select the configuration entries you want to remove and click Delete to remove them Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 34 4 1 Example DHCP Relay for Two VLANs The following example displays t
10. cm 11 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently 2 7 2 Enabling IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication Follow the steps below to enable port authentication to validate access to ports 1 8 to clients based on a RADIUS server 1 Click Advanced Application gt Port Authentication and then the Click Here link for 802 1x Port Authentication d Click here Click here 802 1x MAC Authentication XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2 Select the first Active checkbox to enable 802 1x authentication on the Switch Select the Active checkboxes for ports 1 to 8 to turn on 802 1x authentication on the selected ports Click Apply c IAD Port Authentication Guest Vian Active Port NAE Max Req Reauth Reauth period Quiet period Tx period Supp Timeout secs secs secs secs O On AN o 1 vl 2 On v 3600 60 30 30 2 e 2 On 3600 60 30 30 3 zl 2 On v 3600 60 30 30 4 v 2 On 3600 60 30 30 5 NN On Y 3600 C 30 30 6 n 2 On 3600 60 30 30 7 a 2 On 3600 60 30 30 8 2 On v 3600 60 30 30 9 Fl 2 On 3600 60 30 30 V A B hae a Be o Men n Y 130 2 7 3 Enabling Guest VLAN 1 Click the Guest Vlan link in the 802 1x screen XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2 Select Active and enter the guest VLAN ID 200 in this example on ports 1 2 and 3 The Switch
11. LABEL DESCRIPTION Entry This is the client set index number A client set is a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Active Select this check box to activate this secured client set Clear the check box if you wish to temporarily disable the set without deleting it Start Address End Address Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can manage this Switch The Switch checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or protocol matches the range set here The Switch immediately disconnects the session if it does not match Telnet FTP HTTP I CMP Select services that may be used for managing the Switch from the specified trusted SNMP SSH HTTPS computers Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide 37 Diagnostic This chapter explains the Diagnostic screen 37 1 Diagnostic Click Management gt Diagnostic in the navigation panel to open this screen Use this screen to check system logs ping IP addresses or perform port tests Figure 183 Management gt Di
12. RX CRC This field shows the number of frames received with CRC Cyclic Redundant Check error s Length This field shows the number of frames received with a length that was out of range Runt This field shows the number of frames received that were too short shorter than 64 octets including the ones with CRC errors Distribution XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 5 System Status and Port Statistics Table 12 Status gt Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION 64 This field shows the number of frames including bad frames received that were 64 octets in length 65 127 This field shows the number of frames including bad frames received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length 128 255 This field shows the number of frames including bad frames received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length 256 511 This field shows the number of frames including bad frames received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length 512 1023 This field shows the number of frames including bad frames received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length 1024 1518 This field shows the number of frames including bad frames received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length Giant This field shows the number of frames including bad frames received that were between 1519 octets and the maximum frame size The maximum frame size varies depending on your switch mo
13. MENU SUB MENU 1 SUB MENU 2 SUB MENU 3 IP Source Guard Static Binding DHCP Snooping Configure Port VLAN ARP Inspection VLAN Status Log Status Configure Port VLAN 24 1 2 DHCP Snooping Overview Use DHCP snooping to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding table dynamically This can prevent clients from getting IP addresses from unauthorized DHCP servers 24 1 2 1 Trusted vs Untrusted Ports Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for DHCP snooping This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for ARP inspection You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP packets that each port trusted or untrusted can receive each second Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches The Switch discards DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high The Switch learns dynamic bindings from trusted ports Note The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers The Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted ports in the following situations The packet is a DHCP server packet for example OFFER ACK or NACK The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the current bindings The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet and the source MAC address and source port do
14. XS3900 48F User s Guide Static MAC Forward Setup Use these screens to configure static MAC address forwarding 8 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure forwarding rules based on MAC addresses of devices on your network 8 2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding A static MAC address is an address that has been manually entered in the MAC address table Static MAC addresses do not age out When you set up static MAC address rules you are setting static MAC addresses for a port This may reduce the need for broadcasting Static MAC address forwarding together with port security allows only computers in the MAC address table on a port to access the Switch See Chapter 17 on page 148 for more information on port security Click Advanced Applications gt Static MAC Forwarding in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 41 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding Static MAC Forwarding P Active O Name MAC Address VID Port Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Port Delete Delete Cancel XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 8 Static MAC Forward Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 28 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing t
15. Delete To delete the profile s and all the accompanying rules select the profile s that you want to remove in the Delete Profile column then click the Delete button To delete a rule s from a profile select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete Rule column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete Profile Delete Rule check boxes 22 6 MVR Overview Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD that use multicast traffic across an Ethernet ring based service provider network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network While isolated in different subscriber VLANs connected devices can subscribe to and unsubscribe from the multicast stream in the multicast VLAN This improves bandwidth utilization with reduced multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management MVR only responds to IGMP join and leave control messages from multicast groups that are configured under MVR Join and leave reports from other multicast groups are managed by IGMP snooping XS3900 48F User s Guide 179 Chapter 22 Multicast The following figure shows a network example The subscriber VLAN 1 2 and 3 information is hidden from the streaming media server S In addition the multicast VLAN information is only visible to the Switch and S Figure 93 MVR Network
16. 4 Enter 1 for both Start VID and End VID since both the Switch and PPPoE server are in VLAN 1 in this example Click Apply A AU ED Show VLAN VID start VID 1 Enabled No v O Circuitid Intermediate Agent End VID 1 Remote id O 5 Then select Yes to enable PPPoE IA in VLAN 1 and also select Circuit id and Remote id to allow the Switch to add these two strings to frames tagged with VLAN 1 and pass to the PPPoE server Click Apply A VLAN J Intermediate Agent Show VLAN Start VID End VID Apply VID Enabled Circuit id Remote id j No Y o o 1 Yes Y v Apply XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2 3 2 Configuring Switch B The example uses an XGS4700 48F as switch B 1 Click Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent Select Active then click Apply 6 Intermediate Agent Port VLAN PPPoE access node identifier XGS4700 circuit id Active oO identifier string option Spv M delimiter x Click Port on the top of the screen 2 Select Trusted for ports 11 and 12 and then click Apply A Pot J VLAN Intermediate Agent Port Server Trusted State Circuit id Remote id Untrusted 1 Untrusted 2 Untrusted iM Untrusted w 4 Untrusted 5 Untrusted 6 Untrusted Untusted f 8 Untrusted j 9 Untrusted v 10 Untrusted Tused Y Trusted j 13 Untrusted 44
17. ControlledResetEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 1 This trap is sent when the Switch resets by an administrator through a management interface RebootEvent 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 1 1 2 This trap is sent when the Switch reboots by an administrator through a management interface timesync RTCNotUpdatedEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 1 This trap is sent when the Switch fails to get the time and date from a time server RTCNotUpdatedEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 2 This trap is sent when the Switch gets the time and date from a time server intrusionlock IntrusionLockEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 1 This trap is sent when intrusion lock occurs on a port loopguard LoopguardEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 1 This trap is sent when loopguard shuts down a port errdisable errdisableDetect 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 130 4 1 This trap is sent when an error is detected on a port such as a loop occurs or the rate limit for specific control packets is exceeded errdisableRecovery 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 130 4 2 This trap is sent when the Switch ceases the action taken on a port such as shutting down the port or discarding packets on the port after the specified recovery interval Table 131 SNMP InterfaceTraps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION linkup linkUp 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 This trap is sent when the Et
18. New Time hh min ss Enter the new time in hour minute and second format The new time then appears in the Current Time field after you click Apply Current Date This field displays the date you open this menu New Date yyyy mm dd Enter the new date in year month and day format The new date then appears in the Current Date field after you click Apply Time Zone Select the time difference between UTC Universal Time Coordinated formerly known as GMT Greenwich Mean Time and your time zone from the drop down list box Daylight Saving Time Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time is displayed in the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select Second Sunday March and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So
19. Current This shows the current temperature at this sensor MAX This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor MIN This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor Threshold This field displays the upper temperature limit at this sensor Status This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those above Fan Speed A properly functioning fan is an essential component along with a sufficiently ventilated RPM cool operating environment in order for the device to stay within the temperature threshold Each fan has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the fan speed falls below the threshold shown Current This field displays this fan s current speed in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MAX This field displays this fan s maximum speed measured in RPM MIN This field displays this fan s minimum speed measured in RPM 41 is displayed for speeds too small to measure under 2000 RPM Threshold This field displays the minimum speed at which a normal fan should work Status Normal indicates that this fan is functioning above the minimum speed Error indicates that this fan is functioning below the minimum speed Voltage V The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the voltage falls out of the tolerance range Current This is the current voltage reading MAX This field displa
20. 22 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch Shared resources such as a Server can be used by all ports in the same VLAN as the server In the following figure only ports that need access to the server need to be part of VLAN 1 Ports can belong to other VLAN groups too Figure 3 Shared Server Using VLAN Example 1 lt gt AS A VLAN 1 j A VLANT g TATEM VLANOS I E H 4 il mua ES ES gt L L LI See ee ee mom ee eee eee e eee eee eee eee m 9 1 6 IPv6 Support IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 is designed to enhance IP address size and features The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits from the 32 bit IPv4 address allows up to 3 4 x 1038 IP addresses At the time of writing the Switch supports the following features Static address assignment and stateless auto configuration Neighbor Discovery Protocol a protocol used to discover other I Pv6 devices in a network Remote Management using ping SNMP telnet HTTP and FTP services CMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet processing and perform diagnostic functions such as ping IPv4 IPv6 dual stack the Switch can run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time DHCPv6 client and relay Multicast Listener Discovery MLD snooping and proxy For more information on IPv6 refer to the CLI Reference Guide
21. For each LAN segment a designated bridge is selected This bridge has the lowest cost to the root among the bridges connected to the LAN 11 1 2 How STP Works After a bridge determines the lowest cost spanning tree with STP it enables the root port and the ports that are the designated ports for connected LANs and disables all other ports that participate in STP Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports eliminating any possible network loops STP aware switches exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs periodically When the bridged LAN topology changes a new spanning tree is constructed Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the root bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Max Age the bridge assumes that the link to the root bridge is down This bridge then initiates negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to re establish a valid network topology 11 1 3 STP Port States STP assigns five port states to eliminate packet looping A bridge port is not allowed to go directly from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops Table 32 STP Port States PORT STATE DESCRIPTION Disabled STP is disabled default Blocking Only configuration and management BPDUs are received and processed Listening All BPDUs are received and p
22. Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Topology Changed Times This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 11 6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MRSTP click MRSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Section 11 1 on page 107 for more information on MRSTP Figure 56 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protoco Status Tree Active Bridge Priority Hello Time MAX Age Forwarding Delay 1 32768 v 2 seconds 20 seconds 15 2 32768 v 2 seconds 20 seconds 15 3 32768 v 2 seconds 20 seconds 15 4 32768 v 2 seconds 20 _ seconds 15 Port Active Edge Priority Path Cost Tree 1 1 v 128 B 1 2 Y 128 4 1 3 Y 128 B liv 4 v 128 1 m 5 Y 128 4 1 mw 6 v 128 E 1i O o gae eal sd um a r ol calla o mdi The follow
23. XS3900 48F User s Guide 199 IP Source Guard Use IP source guard to filter unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network 24 1 IP Source Guard Overview IP source guard uses a binding table to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network A binding contains these key attributes MAC address VLAN ID P address Port number When the Switch receives a DHCP or ARP packet it looks up the appropriate MAC address VLAN ID IP address and port number in the binding table If there is a binding the Switch forwards the packet If there is not a binding the Switch discards the packet The Switch builds the binding table by snooping DHCP packets dynamic bindings and from information provided manually by administrators static bindings IP source guard consists of the following features Static bindings Use this to create static bindings in the binding table DHCP snooping Use this to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding table dynamically ARP inspection Use this to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network If you want to use dynamic bindings to filter unauthorized ARP packets typical implementation you have to enable DHCP snooping before you enable ARP inspection XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 1 1 IP Source Guard Menu Overview Table 82 IP Source Guard Menu Overview
24. 1 4 High Performance Switching Example The Switch is ideal for connecting two geographically dispersed networks that need high bandwidth In the following example a company uses the optional 10 Gigabit uplink modules to connect the headquarters to a branch office network Within the headquarters network a company can use trunking to group several physical ports into one logical higher capacity link Trunking can be used if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link Figure 2 High Performance Switching 10 Gbps Nise _ E e IND unl l l l T Trunk I i lt w gt ye 1001 001 x Branch 4 A 1 5 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Application Example A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Stations on a logical network belong to one or more groups With VLAN a station cannot directly talk to or hear from stations that are not in the same group s unless such traffic first goes through a router For more information on VLANs refer to Chapter 7 on page 81 1 5 0 1 Tag based VLAN Example Ports in the same VLAN group share the same frame broadcast domain thus increasing network performance by reducing broadcast traffic VLAN groups can be modified at any time by adding moving or changing ports without any re cabling
25. 1 7 Ways to Manage the Switch Use any of the following methods to manage the Switch Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the Switch using a supported web browser See Chapter 4 on page 53 Command Line Interface Line commands offer an alternative to the Web Configurator and may be necessary to configure advanced features See the CLI Reference Guide FTP Use File Transfer Protocol for firmware upgrades and configuration backup restore See Section 35 8 on page 273 XS3900 48F User s Guide 23 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch SNMP The device can be monitored and or managed by an SNMP manager See Section 36 3 on page 276 1 8 Good Habits for Managing the Switch Do the following things regularly to make the Switch more secure and to manage the Switch more effectively Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters Write down the password and put it in a safe place Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the Switch to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the Switch You could simply restore your last configuration
26. B gt D 5 El El El MAA E v1 v v ml FIEIE e e e e all gt maaa aR Ira fcc 2 Hanana 8 9 10 1 RB 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 H 12 13 14 15 16 7 7 mM E E m e AMARA I I I a AE aa Na al alatalo al ca ca ra ca Roca EAE a ca ca ca ca NN a mmu racc 2 Setting Wizard The following screen shows users on a port based all connected VLAN configuration Figure 39 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Port Based VLAN Setup All Connected II EE f ca FEED c 2 gt 2 s ss x 2 3 4 5
27. O A I O 105 LE Conoc a Fenno RUIG emet T EMIT 105 Chapter 11 Spanning Tres Proto 107 WMA STS UP PE EU 107 TELISTP TEMO cn ag lena ab AER Hiro een reat uae 107 Tbe We STP AMS ni abad 108 ULA STR PON SES senoidal 108 SARA AE a aro 108 A A T 109 TES Spanning Tres Protocol SEE DOFBBII cse derbi acr cdi aas ti avai tease p cu Ri da 112 31 2 opaning Mes Conia arms a apa cd ca caras 112 11 4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Prolagal cani ns 113 XS3900 48F User s Guide Table of Contents TLS Rapid spanning Tres Protocol Glee rr d dor co alebat a PORE UR Ran 114 11 6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol eeeecceeseceeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeceeeetenaeeeeaes 116 11 7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status circa ete ree ene i Ran Ronan nad P 11 8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol rin enr eo bir iE PER Pra a Mrs RR aa 119 11 8 1 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Port Configuration sseeeeeennn 122 11 9 Multiple Spaming Tree Protocol SUMUS aci 123 Chapter 12 Bandwidth Be jj 125 EE PI rr TREE T 125 pae rolg conti 125 T22 Bani onra SO P a 126 Chapter 13 prs far esp aquse Lo 2 BS RN 128 tl Broadcast Stormi Comro SOLD rra di 128 Chapter 14 Mirr OYING PRI EA 130 LEITET IL 130 Chapter
28. install Certificaten Issuer Statement XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control 36 5 2 4 Mozilla Firefox Warning Messages When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a This Connection is Unstructed screen may display If that is the case click Understand the Risks and then the Add Exception button Figure 178 Security Alert Mozilla Firefox 7 Untrusted Connection Mozilla Firefox File Edit view History Bookmarks Tools Help C X a https 192 168 1 1 LA Most Visited i3 Getting Started A Latest Headlines 4 Untrusted Connection This Connection is Untrusted You have asked Firefox to connect securely to 192 168 1 1 but we can t confirm that your connection is secure Normally when you try to connect securely sites will present trusted identification to prove that you are going to the right place However this site s identity can t be verified What Should Do If you usually connect to this site without problems this error could mean that someone is trying to impersonate the site and you shouldn t continue Get me out of here Technical Details Understand the Risks If you understand what s going on you can tell Firefox to start trusting this site s identification Even if you trust the site this error could mean that someone is tampering with your connection Don t add an exception unless you know there s a good reason why
29. Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device 35 8 2 FTP Command Line Procedure 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer 2 Enter open followed by a space and the IP address of your Switch 3 Press ENTER when prompted for a username the default is admin 4 Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary 6 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the Switch for example put firmware bin ras 0 transfers the firmware on your computer firmware bin to the Switch and renames it to ras 0 Similarly put config cfg config transfers the configuration file on your computer config cfg to the Switch and renames it to config Likewise get config config cfg transfers the configuration file on the Switch to your computer and renames it to config cfg See Table 126 on page 273 for more information on filename conventions 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt 35 8 3 GUI based FTP Clients The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI based FTP clients Table 127 General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients COMMAND DESCRIPTION Host Address Enter the address of the host server Login Type Anonymous This is when a user I D and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled
30. JJ Sa Nos 1 Host Identification The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server The server identifies itself with a host key The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the result back to the server The client automatically saves any new server public keys In subsequent connections the server public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer XS3900 48F User s Guide 287 Chapter 36 Access Control 2 Encryption Method Once the identification is verified both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption method to use 3 Authentication and Data Transmission After the identification is verified and data encryption activated a secure tunnel is established between the client and the server The client then sends its authentication information user name and password to the server to log in to the server 36 5 1 1 SSH Implementation on the Switch Your Switch supports SSH version 2 using RSA authentication and three encryption methods DES 3DES and Blowfish The SSH server is implemented on the Switch for remote management and file transfer on port 22 Only one SSH connection is allowed at a time 36 5 1 2 Requirements for Using SSH You must install an SSH client program on a client computer Windows or Linux operating system that is used to connect to the Switch over SSH 36 5 2 HTTPS HTTPS HyperText Tr
31. LABEL DESCRIPTION GARP Timer Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values See Chapter 7 on page 81 for more background information Join Timer Join Timer sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a Join Period timer The allowed J oin Time range is between 100 and 65535 milliseconds the default is 200 milliseconds See Chapter 7 on page 81 for more background information Leave Timer Leave Time sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave Period timer Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer the default is 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave All Period timer Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer Priority Queue Assignment IEEE 802 1p defines up to eight separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the ingress port Use the following fields to configure the priority level to physical queue mapping The Switch has eight physical queues that y
32. Note If you disable HTTP in the Service Access Control screen then the Switch blocks all HTTP connection attempts 36 5 2 1 HTTPS Example If you haven t changed the default HTTPS port on the Switch then in your browser enter https Switch IP Address as the web site address where Switch IP Address is the IP address or domain name of the Switch you wish to access 36 5 2 2 Internet Explorer Warning Messages 36 5 2 3 Internet Explorer 7 or 8 When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a screen with the message There is a problem with this website s security certificate may display If that is the case click Continue to this website not recommended to proceed to the web configurator login screen Figure 175 Security Certificate Warning Internet Explorer 7 or 8 9 There is a problem with this website s security certificate N Security certificate problems may indicate an attempt to fool you or intercept any data you send to the server We recommend that you close this webpage and do not continue to this website Y Click here to close this webpage More information XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control After you log in you will see the red address bar with the message Certificate Error Click on Certificate Error next to the address bar and click View certificates Figure 176 Certificate Error Internet Explorer 7 or 8 gt Web Configurator
33. XS3900 48F User s Guide Error Disable This chapter shows you how to configure the rate limit for control packets on a port and set the Switch to take an action such as to shut down a port or stop sending packets on a port when the Switch detects a pre configured error It also shows you how to configure the Switch to automatically undo the action after the error is gone 30 1 CPU Protection Overview Switches exchange protocol control packets in a network to get the latest networking information If a switch receives large numbers of control packets such as ARP BPDU or IGMP packets which are to be processed by the CPU the CPU may become overloaded and be unable to handle regular tasks properly The CPU protection feature allows you to limit the rate of ARP BPDU and IGMP packets to be delivered to the CPU on a port This enhances the CPU efficiency and protects against potential DoS attacks or errors from other network s You then can choose to drop control packets that exceed the specified rate limit or disable a port on which the packets are received 30 2 Error Disable Recovery Overview Some features such as loop guard or CPU protection allow the Switch to shut down a port or discard specific packets on a port when an error is detected on the port For example if the Switch detects that packets sent out the port s loop back to the Switch the Switch can shut down the port s automatically After that you need to enable the
34. e Database Status Description Status Agent URL Write delay timer 300 seconds Abort timer 300 seconds Agent running None Delay timer expiry Not Running Aborttimer expiry Not Running Last succeeded time None Last failed time None Last failed reason No failure recorded Times Total attempts 0 Startup failures 0 Successful transfers 0 Failed transfers 0 Successful reads 0 Failed reads 0 Successful writes 0 Failed writes 0 Database detail Description Status First successful access None Last ignored bindings counters Binding collisions D Invalid interfaces 0 Parse failures 0 Expired leases 0 Unsupported vlans D Lastignored time None Total ignored bindings counters Binding collisions Invalid interfaces Parse failures Expired leases Unsupported vlans cioioioio The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 85 DHCP Snooping LABEL DESCRIPTION Database Status This section displays the current settings for the DHCP snooping database You can configure them in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 24 5 on page 209 Agent URL This field displays the location of the DHCP snooping database XS3900 48F User s Guide 207 Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Table 85 DHCP Snooping continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Write delay timer This field displays how long in seconds the Switch tries to complete a specific update in the DHCP snooping database b
35. gem EE e e e gt PB e e e e et e v v v v v a mmi y E Y v arg e v v v a mmm E Y 1 Meana MAREA v iv v v atat v vl v MAREA e v s 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 Iv v v rer Ma v v v a m 2 Y v v 2 2 a ca ag v v E mim ME e umm calc v v V AMM v v v E za e v v E ee gt Ibl y CICI BS GICICICIG m S m CICE BIB amp BJ Bip 5 pas ee PRES m gt e m SRG 5 e 5 5 5 5 5 oo 3 BI Bl E pi p B S ooo po B B 1 El Bp BE gt BI D I D S BI p BI Bl Bl Ibl El 5 3 BI BI E B B BI BJ 3 B B B BI 5 El El 5 Bl 3 B B1 S El SEA Ss 5 El El B ea Soo Bl 5 Bl El oe 218 5 Bl Bl Bl es Bl 5 5 B EE D D v E v IA e m e e fa Bl El E ari El el El El
36. Backup Follow the steps below to back up the current Switch configuration to your computer in this screen Click Backup Click Save to display the Save As screen Choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop down list box and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box Click Save to save the configuration file to your computer XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 35 Maintenance 35 8 FTP Command Line This section shows some examples of uploading to or downloading files from the Switch using FTP commands First understand the filename conventions 35 8 1 Filename Conventions The configuration file also known as the romfile or ROM contains the factory default settings in the screens such as password Switch setup IP Setup and so on Once you have customized the Switch s settings they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the ras file is the system firmware and has a bin filename extension Table 126 Filename Conventions INTERNAL EXTERNAL FILE TYPE NAME NAME DESCRIPTION Configuration File config cfg This is the configuration config filename on the Switch Uploading the config file replaces the specified configuration file system including your Switch configurations system related data including the default password the error log and the trace log Firmwar
37. LA onfigure Configure Start vip 100 End VID 100 Show VLAN VID Enabled Option82 Information No y ri a 100 r n 8 Click Save at the top right corner of the web configurator to save the configuration permanently 9 Connect your DHCP server to port 5 and a computer as DHCP client to either port 6 or 7 The computer should be able to get an IP address from the DHCP server If you put the DHCP server on port 6 or 7 the computer will not able to get an IP address 10 To check if DHCP snooping works go to Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard you should see an IP assignment with the type dhcp snooping as shown E IP Source Guard Static Binding DHCP Snooping ARP Inspection Index MAC Address IP Address Lease Type VID Port 00 02 00 00 00 1c 10 10 1 16 6d23h17m 0s dhcp snooping 100 You can also telnet or log into the Switch s console Use the command show dhcp snooping binding to see the DHCP snooping binding table as shown next sysname show dhcp snooping binding MacAddress IpAddress Lease Type VLAN Port 00 02 00 00 00 1c 10 10 1 16 6d23h59m20s dhcp snooping 100 7 Total number of bindings 1 2 2 How to Use DHCP Relay on the Switch This tutorial describes how to configure your Switch to forward DHCP client requests to a specific DHCP server The DHCP server can then assign a specific IP address based on the information in the DHCP requests 28
38. VID 81 84 85 167 number of possible VIDs 81 priority frame 81 VID VLAN Identifier 81 VLAN 73 81 acceptable frame type 89 automatic registration 82 ID 81 ingress filtering 88 introduction 73 number of VLANs 84 port number 85 port settings 88 port based VLAN 95 port based all connected 98 port based isolation 98 port based wizard 98 static VLAN 86 94 status 84 85 tagged 81 trunking 83 89 type 74 83 VLAN Virtual Local Area Network 73 VLAN mapping 224 activating 225 configuration 226 example 224 priority level 224 tagged 224 traffic flow 224 untagged 224 VLAN ID 224 VLAN number 77 XS3900 48F User s Guide Index VLAN stacking 165 167 configuration 168 example 165 frame format 167 port roles 166 168 port based Q in Q 169 priority 167 selective Q in Q 170 VLAN Trunking Protocol see VTP VLAN protocol based See protocol based VLAN VLAN subnet based See subnet based VLANs 89 VSA 195 VTP 231 W warranty 321 note 321 web configurator 23 53 getting help 61 layout 54 login 53 logout 61 navigation panel 56 weight queuing 163 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR 163 WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing 163 WRR Weighted Round Robin Scheduling 163 Z ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System 273 XS3900 48F User s Guide EN Index 332 XS3900 48F User s Guide
39. WFQ is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights By default the weight for QO is 1 for Q1 is 2 for Q2 is 3 and so on The weights range from 1 to 15 and the actual guaranteed bandwidth is calculated as follows Weight x 2 KB If the weight setting is 5 the actual quantum guaranteed to the associated queue would be as follows 5 x 2KB 10 KB XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 20 Queuing Method 20 1 3 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle A queue is given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of the incoming traffic on that port This queue then moves to the back of the list The next queue is given an equal amount of bandwidth and then moves to the end of the list and so on depending on the number of queues being used This works in a looping fashion until a queue is empty Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR uses the same algorithm as round robin scheduling but services queues based on their priority and queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field rather than a fixed amount of bandwidth WRR is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights This queuing mechanism is highl
40. You can also configure a protocol based VLAN or a subnet based VLAN in these screens Static MAC This link takes you to screens where you can configure static MAC addresses for a port Forwarding These static MAC addresses do not age out XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 10 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION Static Multicast This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static multicast MAC addresses for Forwarding port s These static multicast MAC addresses do not age out Filtering This link takes you to a screen to set up filtering rules Spanning Tree This link takes you to screens where you can configure the RSTP MRSTP MSTP to prevent Protocol network loops Bandwidth This link takes you to screens where you can cap the maximum bandwidth allowed on a Control port Broadcast Storm Control This link takes you to a screen to set up broadcast filters Mirroring This link takes you to screens where you can copy traffic from one port or ports to another port in order that you can examine the traffic from the first port without interference Link Aggregation This link takes you to screen where you can logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher bandwidth link Port Authentication This link takes you to a screen where you can configure IEEE 802 1x port authentication as well as MAC authentication f
41. a o o a aaa a oBBBaa 2 cz v v v v v v v v v Iv v v v I v v v v v v v v v v v v v v Iv v v v v v v v Iv v v Iv Iv v v v v v Iv v v v Mo 7 8 9 10 N RB 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4 42 43 44 45 46 47 S ass epi Cancel 97 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 7 VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Setting Choose All connected or Port isolation Wizard All connected means all ports can communicate with each other that is there are no virtual LANs All incoming and outgoing ports are selected This option is the most flexible but also the least secure Port isolation means that each port can only communicate with the CPU management port and cannot communicate with each other All incoming ports are selected while only the CPU outgoing port is selected This option is the most limiting but also the most secure After you make your selection click Apply top right of screen to display the screens as mentioned above You
42. meaning the user can collect information from the Switch Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults Index Username This is a read only number identifying a login account on the Switch Click on an index number to view more details and edit an existing account This field displays the username of a login account on the Switch Security Level This field displays whether you want to implement authentication and or encryption for SNMP communication with this user Authentication This field displays the authentication algorithm used for SNMP communication with this user Privacy This field displays the encryption method used for SNMP communication with this user Group This field displays the SNMP group to which this user belongs Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 36 4 Setting Up Login Accounts Up to five people one administrator and four non administrators may access the Switch vi
43. numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 18 Classifier Table 54 Advanced Application gt Classifier continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 18 3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Classifier screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the Index field Note When two rules conflict with each other a higher layer rule has priority over a lower layer rule Figure 79 Advanced Application gt Classifier Summary Table Index 1 Active Name Rule Delete Example EtherType IP SrcMac 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 SrcPort port 2 rH Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 55 Classifier Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION I
44. puts unauthenticated clients in the specified guest VLAN Set Host mode to Multi Secure to have the Switch authenticate each client that connects to one of these ports and specify the maximum number of clients that the Switch will authenticate on each of these port 5 in this example Click Apply Guest Vian 802 1x Port Active Guest Vian Host mode Multi Secure Num a Mult Host v i v Multi Secure 2 v Multi Secure 3 v Multi Secure 4 O CN Mult Host 1 5 O 1 Mult Host 1 6 O 1 Multi Host 1 7 O 1 Multi Host 1 8 O 1 Mult Host 1 9 o 1 Mult Host 1 10 O ulti H a M e ib ss 3 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently Clients that attach to port 1 2 or 3 and fail to authenticate with the RADIUS server now should be in VLAN 200 and can access the Internet but cannot communicate with devices in VLAN 1 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials XS3900 48F User s Guide Switch Hardware Overview This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the Switch and shows you how to make the hardware connections See the Module Hardware Installation Guide to see how to install the power and fan modules in the Switch See the Rack Mounting Hardware Installation Guide to see how to use the rack mounting kit to install the Switch in a rack 3 1 Front Panel Connections
45. that binding and all others after it are ignored 24 1 2 3 DHCP Relay Option 82 Information The Switch can add information to DHCP requests that it does not discard This provides the DHCP server more information about the source of the requests The Switch can add the following information Slot ID 1 byte port ID 1 byte and source VLAN ID 2 bytes System name up to 32 bytes This information is stored in an Agent I nformation field in the option 82 field of the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames See Chapter 34 on page 263 for more information about DHCP relay option 82 When the DHCP server responds the Switch removes the information in the Agent Information field before forwarding the response to the original source You can configure this setting for each source VLAN This setting is independent of the DHCP relay settings Chapter 34 on page 263 24 1 2 4 Configuring DHCP Snooping Follow these steps to configure DHCP snooping on the Switch 1 Enable DHCP snooping on the Switch 2 Enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN and configure DHCP relay option 82 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 3 Configure trusted and untrusted ports and specify the maximum number of DHCP packets that each port can receive per second 4 Configure static bindings 24 1 3 ARP Inspection Overview Use ARP inspection to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network This can prevent many kinds of man in
46. this is the IP port number f the Protocol is USER this is the IP protocol number Description This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used Table 152 Commonly Used Services NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION AH IPSEC TUNNEL User Defined 51 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header tunneling protocol uses this service AI M New ICQ TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service It is also used as a listening port by ICQ AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client BOOTP SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software UDP 24032 DNS TCP UDP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names for example www zyxel com to IP numbers ESP User Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation Security Protocol IPSEC TUNNEL tunneling protocol uses this service FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 File Transfer Program a program to enable fast transfer of files including large files that may not be TCP 21 possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web XS3900
47. 2 5 1 Make your physical connections make sure that the ports that you want to belong to the trunk group are connected to the same destination The following figure shows ports 2 5 on switch A connected to switch B Figure 67 Trunking Example Physical Connections XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 15 Link Aggregation 2 Configure static trunking Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting n this screen activate trunk group T1 select the traffic distribution algorithm used by this group and select the ports that should belong to this group as shown in the figure below Click Apply when you are done Figure 68 Trunking Example Configuration Screen Link Aggregation Setting Status LACP Group ID Active Criteria T1 v sre dstmac Y T2 sre dstmac v T3 O src dst mac v T4 O stc dst mac iw T5 sre dstmac y T6 ste dstmac De 7 O ste dstmac Y T8 a ste dstmac v T9 sre dstmac v T10 src dstmac M Port Group 1 None None None v IA MMC qM C cM eee eS eV cl Cy Your trunk group 1 T1 configuration is now complete XS3900 48F User s Guide 139 Port Authentication This chapter describes the IEEE 802 1x and MAC authentication methods 16 1 Port Authentication Overview Port authentication is a way to validate access to ports on the Switch to clients based on an external server aut
48. 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure f the VLAN stacking port role is Tunnel Port then the Switch only adds the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure that have an SP TPID different to the one configured on the Switch If an incoming frame s SP TPID is the same as the one configured on the Switch then the Switch will not add the tag Priority refers to the IEEE 802 1p standard that allows the service provider to prioritize traffic based on the class of service CoS the customer has paid for On the Switch configure priority level of the inner IEEE 802 1Q tag in the Port Setup screen e 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest VID is the VLAN ID SP VID is the VID for the second service provider s VLAN tag 21 3 1 Frame Format The frame format for an untagged Ethernet frame a single tagged 802 1Q frame customer and a double tagged 802 1Q frame service provider is shown next Configure the fields as highlighted in the Switch VLAN Stacking screen Table 62 Single and Double Tagged 802 11Q Frame Format DA SA Len Data FCS Untagged Etype Ethernet frame DA SA TPI Priorit VID Len Data FCS IEEE 802 10 D y Etype customer tagged frame DA SA SPTPI Priorit VI TPI Priorit VID Len Data FCS Double tagged D y D D y Etype frame Table 63 802 1Q Frame
49. 274 G GARP 82 GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol 82 GARP terminology 82 GARP timer 75 82 general setup 72 getting help 61 GMT Greenwich Mean Time 73 Guide CLI Reference 2 GVRP 82 88 89 and port assignment 89 GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol 82 H hardware monitor 71 hello time 120 hops 120 HTTPS 288 certificates 288 implementation 288 public keys private keys 288 HTTPS example 289 IEEE 802 1p priority 75 IEEE 802 1x activate 143 146 191 reauthentication 144 IEEE 802 1x port authentication 140 IGMP version 172 IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol 172 IGMP filtering 172 profile 178 profiles 174 IGMP leave timeout fast 175 mormal 175 IGMP snooping 172 MVR 179 IGMP throttling 176 ingress port 98 Internet Protocol version 6 see IPv6 introduction 17 IP setup 76 IP source guard 200 ARP inspection 200 203 DHCP snooping 200 201 static bindings 200 IPv6 23 Neighbor Discovery Protocol 23 ping 23 XS3900 48F User s Guide Index L L2PT 228 access port 229 CDP 228 configuration 230 encapsulation 228 LACP 229 MAC address 228 mode 229 overview 228 PAgP 229 point to point 229 STP 228 tunnel port 229 UDLD 229 VTP 228 LACP 132 231 system priority 138 timeout 138 Layer 2 protocol tunneling see L2PT LEDs 52 limit MAC address learning 149 Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP 132 link aggregation 132 dynamic 132 ID information 133 setup 135 137 status 133 t
50. AAA EE ION A e L UE RE E pe S 269 XS3900 48F User s Guide 3 Contents Overview e A O bodas ana bbc aa db 276 BEE c pent US ccr EN 296 cor Mt MR 297 A UE IUE TEE UIS 300 MAG TAIE ica iaa 306 ARP Tabla 309 A CC UG cuisses doc E E A ce ina pu E S So Sr D a Ori Rd udi Rao On cR 311 A S UE ER ER 313 EN XS3900 48F User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents CAME ag a 3 cio e 5 ludi ci sisi aa EEE A 15 Chapter 1 Getting lo Know Ais 17 Ur Ee M 17 T2 DR Later Bidang rr raid 17 Led PEG ETS and DORK Standards iaa 18 Las DB DON ostia 19 LS BOI Eso aso oo opel T TTE 21 14 High Performans Switehing EXAMS e 22 LSJEEE S02 JO VLAN Application Example sn e iaa i 22 LS IPR ps utem 23 LAWS TO Manage Me SRT e 2d Le Good Habits Tor Menading the IEA noi icis ioa ned o lis FR dap dn a 24 Chapter 2 i 25 2 1 How to Use DHCP Snebping om he SWIEGIT siria 25 2 2 How to Use DHOP Relay ori he WII is prre ter RA rta a Rt 28 22 I DACP Relay TULOKSE SCS rot oa 29 cede up VLAN cas 29 es oa DHCP HB aire Rr p ord tus a EA dia revere a Abs enue nn rere P C HR rere Tr 32 Kus TOUD RUUD ias 33 2 3 Howto Wee PPPOE DX gi the OUO nai 33 zd T6 DANI IC Y ra it Drag 34 eue CONIBUHR STO d
51. Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide 75 Chapter 6 Basic Setting 6 6 IP Setup Use the IP Setup screen to configure the default gateway device the default domain name server and add IP domains Figure 25 Basic Setting gt IP Setup IP Setup Domain Name S Jg ZE Default Management in band Out of band In band Management IP DHCP Client es Static IP Address IP Address VENAS IP Subnet Mask 2 27527520 Default Gateway WERTAG VID 1 Out of band Management IP IP Address 192 168 0 1 Address IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel In band IP Addresses IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 VID Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel Index IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Default Gateway Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 Basic Setting gt IP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Domain Name DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address Server and vice versa Enter a domain name server IP address in order to be able to use a domain name instead of an IP address Default Specify which traffic flow In Band or Out of band the Switch is to send frames Management originating from itself such as SNMP traps or frames with unknown source Select Out of band to have the Switch send the frames to the management port labelled MG
52. Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults Index This is the number of the IGMP snooping VLAN entry in the table Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 22 5 IGMP Filtering Profile An IGMP filtering profile specifies a range of multicast groups that clients connected to the Switch are able to join A profile contains a range of multicast IP addresses which you want clients to be able to join Profiles are assigned to ports in the Multicast Setting screen Clients connected to those ports are then able to join the multicast groups specified in the profile Each port can be assigned a single profile A profile can be assigned to multiple ports 178 Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt I GMP Filtering Profile link to display the screen as shown Figure 92 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile A IGMP Filtering Profile Multicast Setting Profile Setup Profile Name Start Address End Address 224 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 Profile Name Default Add Clear Start Address End Address Delete Profile Delete Rule O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n De
53. Change page LEC Transfer Type The Total Number of MAC Address 0 Index MAC Address VID Port Type Previous Next MAC y 9 Dynamic to MAC forwarding Dynamic to MAC filtering Search Transfer Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 149 Management gt MAC Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Condition Select All to display all MAC addresses in the MAC table Select Static to only display static MAC address es in this screen Select MAC and enter a valid MAC address six hexadecimal character pairs to display the MAC address information in this screen Select VID and type a VLAN identification number to display all MAC addresses in the VLAN Select Port and type the number of a port to display all MAC addresses learned from the port Sort by Select this to display and arrange the data according to MAC address MAC VLAN group VID or port number Port The information is then displayed in the summary table below Transfer Type Search Select Dynamic to MAC forwarding and click Transfer to add the relative dynamic MAC address es you select the criteria here into the static MAC forwarding table see Section 8 2 on page 99 The type of the MAC address es will be changed to static Select Dynamic to MAC filtering and click Transfer to add the relative dynamic MAC address es you make the search here into the static MAC filtering t
54. Circuit id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Circuit ID sub option for PPPoE discovery packets received on this port Spaces are allowed The Circuit ID you configure for a specific VLAN on a port in the Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN screen has the highest priority Remote id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Remote ID sub option for PPPoE discovery packets received on this port Spaces are allowed If you do not specify a string here or in the Remote id field for a VLAN on a port the Switch automatically uses the PPPoE client s MAC address The Remote ID you configure for a specific VLAN on a port in the Advanced Application PPPoE Intermediate Agent Port VLAN screen has the highest priority Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 29 3 2 PPPoE IA Per Port Per VLAN Use this screen to configure PPPoE IA settings that apply to a specific VLAN on a port XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 29 PPPoE Click the VLAN link in the Intermediate Agent gt Port screen to disp
55. Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 16 2 3 Activate MAC Authentication Use this screen to activate MAC authentication In the Port Authentication screen click MAC Authentication to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 75 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication ED MAC Authentication Port Authentication Active i Name Prefix Password zyxel Timeout 0 Port Active O Nn gt W enN gaoa wma mwaaa Apply Cancel XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 51 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit MAC authentication on the Switch Note You must first enable MAC authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Name Prefix Type the prefix that is appended to all MAC addresses sent to the RADIUS server for authentication You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII characters If you leave this field blank then only the MAC address of the client is forw
56. Config 1 button next to Reboot System to reboot and load configuration one The following screen displays Figure 162 Reboot System Confirmation Microsoft Internet Explorer xj 2 Are you sure you want to reboot system E Cancel 2 Click OK again and then wait for the Switch to restart This takes up to two minutes This does not affect the Switch s configuration Click Config 2 and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load configuration two on the Switch 35 5 Firmware Upgrade Make sure you have downloaded and unzipped the correct model firmware and version to your computer before uploading to the device Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device From the Maintenance screen display the Firmware Upgrade screen as shown next Figure 163 Management gt Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade 4 Maintenance To upgrade the internal switch firmware browse the location of the binary BIN file and click Upgrade button File Path l Browse Rebooting Upgrade Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the Switch in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it Select the Rebooting checkbox if you want to reboot the Switch and apply the new firmware immediately Firmware upgrades are only applied after a reboot Click Upgrade to load the new firmware After the firmware upgrade process is
57. DHCP snooping You can also specify the maximum rate at which the Switch receives ARP packets on untrusted ports The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations The sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high 24 1 3 3 Syslog The Switch can send syslog messages to the specified syslog server Chapter 38 on page 297 when it forwards or discards ARP packets The Switch can consolidate log messages and send log messages in batches to make this mechanism more efficient 24 1 3 4 Configuring ARP Inspection Follow these steps to configure ARP inspection on the Switch Configure DHCP snooping See Section 24 1 2 4 on page 202 Note It is recommended you enable DHCP snooping at least one day before you enable ARP inspection so that the Switch has enough time to build the binding table Enable ARP inspection on each VLAN Configure trusted and untrusted ports and specify the maximum number of ARP packets that each port can receive per second 24 2 IP Source Guard Use this screen to look at the current bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection Bindings are used by DHCP snooping and ARP inspection to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized packets in the network The
58. Errdisable Errdisable Recovery select Active and Timer Status for loopguard and ARP entries Also enter 180 180 seconds 3 minutes in the Interval field for both entries Then click Apply Errdisable Recovery Reason Timer Status Interval j O loopguard Y 1 o ARP v 180 BPDU a 300 IGMP i300 Errdisable XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2 5 Creating a VLAN VLANs confine broadcast frames to the VLAN group in which the port s belongs You can do this with port based VLAN or tagged static VLAN with fixed port members 1 In this example you want to configure port 1 as a member of VLAN 2 Figure 7 Initial Setup Network Example VLAN nooo am Internet Y Mer Click Advanced Application gt VLAN in the navigation panel and click the Static VLAN link ORTEN VLAN Port Setting The Number of VLAN 1 Index VID 1 1 Elapsed Time 1 00 31 Change Pages Next Previous In the Static VLAN screen select ACTI VE enter a descriptive name in the Name field and enter 2 in the VLAN Group ID field for the VLAN2 network Status Static ONTA ACTIVE Name VLAN Group ID VLAN Type Association VLAN List Port Y Example 2o O Normal O Private VLAN Status Tagging if 2 Normal Fixed Forbidden Y Tx Tagging 3 Normal O Fixed O Forbidden going E O Normal O Fix
59. Figure 134 Advanced Application gt PPPoE Intermediate Agent a adn Intermediate Agent Click here 29 3 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Use this screen to configure the Switch to give a PPPoE termination server additional subscriber information that the server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPoE client XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 29 PPPoE Click Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 135 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent f Intermediate Agent Port VLAN PPPoE Active access node identifier circuit id Active oO identifier string option spy delimiter v Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 106 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable the PPPoE intermediate agent globally on the Switch access node identifier Enter up to 20 ASCII characters to identify the PPPoE intermediate agent Hyphens and spaces are also allowed The default is the Switch s host name circuit id Use this section to configure the Circuit ID field in the PADI and PADR packets The Circuit ID you configure for a specific port or for a specific VLAN on a port has priority over this The Circuit ID you configure for a specific port in the Advanced Application gt PPPoE
60. IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation For example 192 168 0 1 IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for Gateway example 192 168 0 254 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration In band IP You can create up to 64 IP addresses which are used to access and manage the Switch from address the ports belonging to the pre defined VLAN s You must configure a VLAN first IP Address Enter the IP address for managing the Switch by the members of the VLAN specified in the VID field below IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation Mask VID Type the VLAN group identification number Default Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation Gateway Add Click Add to insert the entry to the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power So use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done conf
61. Lintristad w Then Click I ntermediate Agent on the top of the screen XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 3 The Intermediate Agent screen appears Click VLAN on the top of the screen Intermediate Agent Port PPPoE Active v access node identifier XGS4700 circuit id Active O identifier string option spv x delimiter x 4 Enter 1 for both Start VID and End VID Click Apply RTD Intermediate Agent Show VLAN Start VID 1 End VID 1 VID Enabled Circuit id Remote id No v O O 5 Then select Yes to enable PPPoE IA in VLAN 1 and also select Circuit id and Remote id to allow the Switch to add these two strings to frames tagged with VLAN 1 and pass to the PPPoE server Click Apply A VLAN J Intermediate Agent Show VLAN StartVID End VID Apply VID Enabled Circuit id Remote id a No y O O 1 Yes vi Apply XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials The settings are completed now If you miss some settings above subscriber C could not successfully receive an IP address assigned by the PPPoE Server If this happens make sure you follow the steps exactly in this tutorial 2 4 How to Use Error Disable and Recovery on the Switch This tutorial shows you how to shut down a port when a loop has occurred or too many ARP requests over 100 packets per second have been received on a port You also wa
62. MSTI MSTI allows multiple VLANs to use the same spanning tree Load balancing is possible as traffic from different VLANs can use distinct paths in a region XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 11 1 5 1 MSTP Network Example The following figure shows a network example where two VLANs are configured on the two switches If the switches are using STP or RSTP the link for VLAN 2 will be blocked as STP and RSTP allow only one link in the network and block the redundant link Figure 48 STP RSTP Network Example With MSTP VLANs 1 and 2 are mapped to different spanning trees in the network Thus traffic from the two VLANs travel on different paths The following figure shows the network example using MSTP Figure 49 MSTP Network Example 11 1 5 2 MST Region An MST region is a logical grouping of multiple network devices that appears as a single device to the rest of the network Each MSTP enabled device can only belong to one MST region When BPDUs enter an MST region external path cost of paths outside this region is increased by one Internal path cost of paths within this region is increased by one when BPDUs traverse the region XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Devices that belong to the same MST region are configured to have the same MSTP configuration identification settings These include the following parameters Name of the MST region Revision l
63. Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for access privilege level specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the access privilege configured for local authentication Select radius or tacacs to have the Switch check the access privilege via the external servers XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 23 AAA Table 76 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Login These fields specify which database the Switch should use first second and third to authenticate administrator accounts users for Switch management Configure the local user accounts in the Access Control gt Logins screen The TACACS and RADIUS are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate administrator accounts The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Method 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for administrator accounts specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured in the Access Control gt Logins screen Select radius to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured via the RADIUS Ser
64. Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by ZyXEL Go Ale httos 192 168 1 1 my x Certificate Invalid File Edit View Favorites Tools Help The security certificate presented by this x Google v J search 0 E website has errors Si Favorites 25 H suggested Sites Free Hotmail E Web le Ser Signin This problem might indicate an attempt to Nc Cj dm v Page Safety Toos fool you or intercept any data you send to the server e Web Configurator We recommend that you close this webpage About certificate errors S Save Status Fl Logout H Help View certificates Port Name Link m Pkts Errors TxKB s RxKB s UpTime PA 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 pphes 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Management 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 a 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Click Install Certificate and follow the on screen instructions to install the certificate in your browser Figure 177 Certificate Internet Explorer 7 or 8 Certificate 2 General Details Certification Path Certificate Information This CA Root certificate is not trusted To enable trust install this certificate in the Trusted Root Certification Authorities store Issued to G54700 0019cb000001 Issued by XG54700 0019cb000001 Valid from 1970 01 01 to 2030 03 27
65. Packet TX Collision Error Packet Distribution A IZ Details Port Status Port NO 1 Name Link 1000M F State FORWARDING LACP Disabled TxPkts 6329 RxPkts 4969 Errors 0 Tx KBs s 0 0 Rx KBs s 0 0 Up Time 48 37 56 Unicast 6315 Multicast 0 Broadcast 14 Pause 0 Priority Pause 0 Tagged 0 Unicast 4954 Multicast 0 Broadcast 15 Pause 0 Priority Pause 0 Control 0 Single 0 Multiple 0 Excessive 0 Late 0 RX CRC 0 Length 0 Runt 0 64 5642 65 to 127 433 128 to 255 638 256 to 511 1307 512 to 1023 755 1024 to 1518 2523 Giant 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Status gt Port Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Info Port NO This field displays the port number you are viewing Name This field displays the name of the port Link This field displays the speed 1000M for 1000 Mbps 10G for 10 Gbps and 40G for 40 Gbps and the duplex F for full duplex Status If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 11 1 3 on page 108 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP LACP This field shows if LACP is enabled on this port or not TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field
66. Peer v sfp plus v 13 v 1000M 10G 10G Full Duplex v O v Peer v LAsfp_plus a XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 6 Basic Setting The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 18 Basic Setting gt Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the port index number m Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable a port The factory default for all ports is enabled A port must be enabled for data transmission to occur Name Type a descriptive name that identifies this port You can enter up to 64 alpha numerical characters Note Due to space limitations the port name may be truncated in some web configurator screens Type This field displays 1000M 10G for a 1000Base X connection or 10 Gigabit Ethernet connection or 40G for a 40 Gigabit Ethernet connection Speed Duplex Select the speed and the duplex mode of the Ethernet connection on this port The choices are 1000 Auto use if peer is set as auto negotiable 1000M Full Duplex use if peer is set as the same settings 1000Base X 1Gbps full duplex e 10G Full Duplex use if peer is set at 10Gbps full duplex 40G Full D
67. Queuing or WRR Weighted Round Robin Strictly Priority services queues based on priority only When the highest priority queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue begins Q7 has the highest priority and QO the lowest Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue s minimum bandwidth based on their bandwidth weight the number you configure in the Weight field Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights Weighted Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis based on their queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights Weight When you select WFQ or WRR enter the queue weight here Bandwidth is divided across the Q0 Q7 different traffic queues according to their weights Hybrid This field is applicable only when you select WFQ or WRR SPQ Select a queue QO to Q7 to have the Switch use SPQ to service the subsequent queue s after Lowest and including the specified queue for the 1000Base T 1000Base X and 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports Queue For example if you select Q5 the Switch services traffic on Q5 Q6 and Q7 using SPQ Select None to always use WFQ or WRR Unicast Enter a default weight for unicast traffic from this port The weight is the ratio of unicast traffic to Weight non unicast traffic The allowed range is from 1 to 127 For example
68. RS and LOGI met T Pm 314 25 2 wh ONU ON scs va pais en el daa E ER a abut du o o aay quada 316 Appendix A Common Services EE A 317 Appendix B Legal y Fs iL ha See eee me ete e Bee eee ere 321 M M M 323 XS3900 48F User s Guide PART User s Guide Getting to Know Your Switch This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the Switch 1 1 Introduction This is a high speed layer 2 enhanced Ethernet switch with FCoE Fiber Channel over Ethernet and DCB Data Center Bridging features The Switch comes with Forty eight LOGbE SFP ports and four 40GbE QSFP ports at the front Two power slots for power modules and two slots for fan modules at the back The power and fan modules are hot swappable and you can choose between front to rear and rear to front airflow depending on your installation Other key features include SNMP STP VLAN QinQ Trunk QoS and Access Control With its built in web configurator managing and configuring the Switch is easy In addition the Switch can also be managed via Telnet any terminal emulator program on the console port or third party SNMP management See the datasheet for a full list of software features available on this Switch 1 2 Data Center Bridging DCB A traditional Ethernet network is best effort that is frames may be dropped due to device queue overflow or network congestion FCoE F
69. SNMP gt User Security Level Authentication Privacy Group Index Userna 1 test A omunancnuEstnm SNMP Setting noauth Y MD5 Password DES Password admin v Add Cancel Clear me SecurityLevel Authentication Privacy Group Delete noauth MD5 DES readwrite oO The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 137 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt User LABEL DESCRIPTION User Information Note Use the username and password of the login accounts you specify in this screen to create accounts on the SNMP v3 manager Username Specify the username of a login account on the Switch Security Level Select whether you want to implement authentication and or encryption for SNMP communication from this user Choose noauth to use the username as the password string to send to the SNMP manager This is equivalent to the Get Set and Trap Community in SNMP v2c This is the lowest security level auth to implement an authentication algorithm for SNMP messages sent by this user priv to implement authentication and encryption for SNMP messages sent by this user This is the highest security level Note The settings on the SNMP manager must be set at the same security level or higher than the security level settings on the Switch XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control Table 137 Management gt Access Control gt SN
70. Specify the time from 1 to 16 711 450 in seconds that elapses before the Switch removes an IGMP group membership entry if it does not receive report messages from the port 802 1p Priority Select a priority level 0 7 to which the Switch changes the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets Otherwise select No Change to not replace the priority IGMP Filtering Select Active to enable IGMP filtering to control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join Note If you enable IGMP filtering you must create and assign IGMP filtering profiles for the ports that you want to allow to join multicast groups 174 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Table 68 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Unknown Multicast Frame Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives an unknown multicast frame Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Reserved Multicast Group The IP address range of 224 0 0 0 to 224 0 0 255 are reserved for multicasting on the local network only For example 224 0 0 1 is for all hosts on a local network segment and 224 0 0 9 is used to send RIP routing information to all RIP v2 routers on the same network segment A multicast router will not forward a packet with the destination IP address within this range to other networks See the IANA web site for more informat
71. Switch waits for an accounting request response from the TACACS server Index This is a read only number representing a TACACS accounting server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS accounting server in dotted decimal notation TCP Port The default port of a TACACS accounting server is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS accounting server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS accounting server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 23 AAA 23 2 3 AAA Setup Use this screen to configure authentication authorization and accounting settings on the Switch Click on the AAA Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as shown Figure 105 Advanced Application
72. Tagged 4 c orjorjorjojororco Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 115 Advanced Application gt Private VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Mode Use the row to make the setting the same for all entries Use this row first and then make adjustments to each entry if necessary Note Changes in this row are copied to all the entries as soon as you make them This is the type of VLAN mapped to this port Normal These are ports in a static VLAN This is not a private VLAN Promiscuous Ports in a Primary VLAN are Promiscuous They can communicate with all ports in the Primary VLAN and associated Community and Isolated VLANs They cannot communicate with Promiscuous ports in different primary VLANs Community Ports in a Community VLAN can communicate with Promiscuous ports in an associated Primary VLAN and other community ports in the same Community VLAN They cannot communicate with ports in an Isolated VLAN non associated Primary VLAN Promiscuous ports nor Community ports in different Community VLANs Isolated Ports in an Isolated VLAN can communicate with Promiscuous ports in an associated Primary VLAN only They cannot communicate with other Isolated ports in the same Isolated VLAN non associated Primary VLAN Promiscuous ports nor any Community ports XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 31 Private VLAN Table 115 Advanced Application gt Privat
73. The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 176 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast 22 4 IGMP Snooping VLAN Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast in the navigation panel Click the Multicast Setting link and then the IGMP Snooping VLAN link to display the screen as shown See Section 22 1 4 on page 173 for more information on IGMP Snooping VLAN Figure 91 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN A IGMP Snooping VLAN Multicast Setting Mode C auto C fixed Apply Cancel VLAN Name fc VID po Add Cancel Clear Index Name VID Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 69 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION VLANs automatically VLAN s that you specify below Mode Select auto to have the Switch learn multicast group membership information of any Select fixed to have the Switch only learn multicast group membership information of the In either auto or fixed mode the Switch can learn up to 16 VLANs including up to five VLANs you configured in the MVR screen For example if you have configured one m
74. Type I P VLAN 4 Select the protocol Leave the default value I P 5 Type the VLAN ID of an existing VLAN In our example we already created a static VLAN with an ID of 5 Type 5 XS3900 48F User s Guide ES Chapter 7 VLAN 6 Leave the priority set to O and click Add Figure 37 Protocol Based VLAN Configuration Example D Protocol Based NN Active Vv Port fi PLAN C Others Hex VID B o Name Ethernet type Priority Add Cancel Index Active Port Name Ethernet type VID Delete Cancel Priority Delete To add more ports to this protocol based VLAN Click the index number of the protocol based VLAN entry Click 1 Change the value in the Port field to the next port you want to add Click Add 7 5 7 View Private VLAN Status Use this screen to view all private VLANs created on the Switch See also Advanced Application gt Private VLAN Make sure 802 1Q is selected in the Basic Setting gt Switch Setup screen Click Private VLAN Status in the VLAN Status screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 38 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Private VLAN Status 50 50 50 50 Change Pages 51 53 52 Previous Next EE Private V tatus Primary VLAN Secondary VLAN Type Primary Community Community Isolated VLAN Status Port List XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 7 VLAN Table 26 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Pri
75. VLAN ID tag of 101 I VLAN 102 Isolated private VLAN with VLAN ID tag of 102 This is the communication process if primary VLAN P VLAN 100 is associated with community VLAN C VLAN 101 and isolated VLAN I VLAN 102 Promiscuous ports in P VLAN 100 can communicate with all ports in P VLAN 100 including community ports in C VLAN 101 and isolated ports in I VLAN 102 Community ports in C VLAN 101 can communicate with promiscuous ports in P VLAN 100 and other commuity ports in C VLAN 101 They cannot communicate with isolated ports in I VLAN 102 e Isolated ports can communicate with promiscuous ports in P VLAN 100 They cannot communicate with other isolated ports in I VLAN 102 nor community ports in C VLAN 101 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 31 Private VLAN Note Isolation in VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting see Section 7 5 4 on page 88 has a higher priority than private VLAN settings so promiscuous ports with Isolation in VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting enabled will not be able to communicate with each other 31 1 1 Configuration You must go to the Static VLAN screen first see Section on page 98 to create VLAN IDs for Primary Isolated or Community VLANs Click Advanced Application gt Private VLAN to display the following screen Figure 143 Advanced Application gt Private VLAN x Mode Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal AM A eR UP din a iii Associated VLAN
76. XS3900 48F User s Guide Tutorials This chapter provides some examples of using the web configurator to set up and use the Switch The tutorials include How to Use DHCP Snooping on the Switch How to Use DHCP Relay on the Switch How to Use PPPoE IA on the Switch How to Use Error Disable and Recovery on the Switch Creating a VLAN Setting Port VID How to Set Up a Guest VLAN 2 1 How to Use DHCP Snooping on the Switch You only want DHCP server A connected to port 5 to assign IP addresses to all devices in VLAN 100 Create a VLAN containing ports 5 6 and 7 Connect a computer M to the Switch s MGMT port Figure 4 Tutorial DHCP Snooping Tutorial Overview um um um Em EN m VLAN 100 E EC HB A I Sr m mmmmmmmmmm U Note For related information about DHCP snooping see Section 24 1 on page 200 The settings in this tutorial are as the following Table5 Settings in this Tutorial HOST CONNECTED MEAN PVID DHCP SNOOPING PORT TRUSTED DHCP Server A 5 1 and 100 100 Yes DHCP Client B 6 1 and 100 100 No DHCP Client C 7 1 and 100 100 No XS3900 48F User s Guide 25 Chapter 2 Tutorials 1 Access the Switch from the MGMT port through http 192 168 0 1 by default Log into the Switch by entering the username default admin and password default 1234 2 Goto Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN and create a VLAN with ID o
77. ZyXEL local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact your vendor You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http www zyxel com web support warranty info php Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information a
78. a Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 31 on page 107 for more information Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 11 5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 11 1 on page 107 for more information on RSTP XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Note This screen is only available after you activate RSTP on the Switch Figure 55 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP Spanning Tree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanni
79. a Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 11 9 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as sh own next See Section 11 1 5 on page 109 for more information on MSTP Note This screen is only available after you activate MSTP on the Switch Figure 60 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP CST Bridge Bridge ID Hello Time second Max Age second Forwarding Delay second Cost to Bridge Port ID Configuration Name Revision Number Configuration Digest Topology Changed Times Time Since Last Change Instance Instance 0 MSTI 1 y Bridge Bridge ID internal Cost Port ID Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Root Our Bridge 0000 000000000000 8000 000000000000 0 2 0 20 0 15 0 0 0x0000 0x0000 001349000002 0 A317523DB32DA2D62 0 0 VLAN 1 4093 Regional Root Our Bridge 0000 000000000000 8001 000000000000 0 0 0x
80. access This field displays the first time the Switch accessed the DHCP snooping database for any reason XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Table 85 DHCP Snooping continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Last ignored bindings counters This section displays the number of times and the reasons the Switch ignored bindings the last time it read bindings from the DHCP binding database You can clear these counters by restarting the Switch or using CLI commands See the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the port number was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the lease time had already expired Unsupported vians This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the VLAN ID does not exist anymore Last ignored time This field displays the last time the Switch ignored any bindings for any reason from the DHCP binding database Total ignored
81. address learning to occur on a port the port itself must be active with address learning enabled Limited Number of Learned MAC Address Use this field to limit the number of dynamic MAC addresses that may be learned on a port For example if you set this field to 5 on port 2 then only the devices with these five learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time A sixth device must wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses ages out MAC address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen The valid range is from 0 to 16384 0 means this feature is disabled Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 17 Port Security 17 3 VLAN MAC Address Limit Use this screen to set the MAC address learning limit on per port and per VLAN basis Click VLAN MAC Address Limit in the Advanced Application gt Port Security screen to display the screen as shown Figure 77 Advanced Application gt Port Security gt VLAN MAC Address Limit O VLAN MAC Address Limit 1 Port Security Active O Port VID Limit Number Add Cancel Clear Index Active Port VID L
82. ae Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 93 ARP Inspection Port Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number If you configure the port the settings are applied to all of the ports Trusted State Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations The sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high You can specify the maximum rate at which ARP packets can arrive on untrusted ports Limit Rate and Burst Interval settings have no effect on trusted ports Rate pps Specify the maximum rate 1 2048 packets per second at which the Switch receives ARP packets from each port The Switch discards any additional ARP packets Enter 0 to disable this limit Burst interval The burst interval is the length of time over which the rate of ARP packets is seconds monitored for each port For example if the Rate is 15 pps and the burst interval is 1 second then the Switch accepts a maximum of 15 ARP packets in every one second interval If the burst interval is 5 seconds then the Switch accepts a maximum of 75 ARP packets in every five second interval Enter the length 1 15 s
83. and data for 10 1 1 0 24 The Switch can then be configured to group incoming traffic based on the source IP subnet of incoming frames You can then configure a subnet based VLAN with priority 6 and VID of 100 for traffic received from IP subnet 172 16 1 0 24 voice services You can also have a subnet based VLAN with priority 5 and VID of 200 for traffic received from IP subnet 192 168 1 0 24 video services Lastly you can configure VLAN with priority 3 and VID of 300 for traffic received from IP subnet 10 1 1 0 24 data XS3900 48F User s Guide IN Chapter 7 VLAN services All untagged incoming frames will be classified based on their source IP subnet and prioritized accordingly That is video services receive the highest priority and data the lowest Internet D SY Figure 33 Subnet Based VLAN Application Example Tagged Frames R EERE Untagged Frames 7 5 5 1 Configuring Subnet Based VLAN Click Subnet Based VLAN in the VLAN Port Setting screen to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 34 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Vian Port Setting a OEIT Active E DHCP Vlan Override O Apply Active n Name IP Mask Bits VID Priority Add Cancel Index Active Name IP Mask Bits VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 7 VLAN The following table describes the labels in this
84. as an edge port when it is directly attached to a computer An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forwarding state immediately without going through listening and learning states right after the port is configured as an edge port or when its link status changes Note An edge port becomes a non edge port as soon as it receives a Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in the Switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended that you assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 31 on page 107 for more information Tree Select which STP tree configuration this port should participate in Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 11 7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree
85. aware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch the Switch first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag To forward a frame from an 802 10 VLAN unaware switch to an 802 10 VLAN aware switch the Switch first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports but this can be changed A broadcast frame or a multicast frame for a multicast group that is known by the system is duplicated only on ports that are members of the VID except the ingress port itself thus confining the broadcast to a specific domain XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 7 VLAN 7 2 Automatic VLAN Registration GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches 7 2 1 GARP GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol allows network switches to register and de register attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN GARP is a protocol that provides a generic mechanism for protocols that serve a more specific application for example GVRP 7 2 1 1 GARP Timers Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values 7 2 2 GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registr
86. bandwidth can be allocated based on the priority of the traffic received on that port Table4 Bound Traffic Priorities PRIORITY TRAFFIC CLASS ID NAME N oO Oy B W N H O OC RP PIL RP PIN NIN Uu gt 2 Default PFC Estimate what traffic types are likely to cause network congestion and configure PFC with these associated priorities For example if SAN traffic is likely to cause congestion then configure PFC with priorities 3 4 5 6 It s better if the connected peer switch has the same configured priorities 1 2 2 2 DCB with DCBX Do the following if you re using DCB with DCBX that is switches need to know each other s PFC ETS and application priority information Enable transmission and reception of LLDP PDUs Protocol Data Unit on a port using 11dp admin status tx rx Enable TLV Type Length Value transmission of formats so that switches can read each others ETS PFC and application priority information sent via LLDP PDUs Configure ETS as outlined in the previous section Configure application priority for all FCoE traffic on the Switch XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch Set PFC to auto Willing True if you want the Switch to accept PFC priority configuration from another switch In the following example switch A sends its LLDP PDU with PFC TLY local priorities 3 4 5 and auto Willing field is set to true meani
87. bindings counters This section displays the reasons the Switch has ignored bindings any time it read bindings from the DHCP binding database You can clear these counters by restarting the Switch or using CLI commands See the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the Switch already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the port number was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the Switch was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the lease time had already expired Unsupported vlans This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the VLAN ID does not exist anymore 24 5 DHCP Snooping Configure Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch not on specific VLAN specify the VLAN where the default DHCP server is located and configure the DHCP snooping database The DHCP snooping database stores the current bindings on a secure external TFTP server so that they are XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard still available after a restart
88. buffer there is an entry called overflow with the current number of dropped log messages Index This field displays a sequential number for each log message Port This field displays the source port of the ARP packet VID This field displays the source VLAN ID of the ARP packet Sender MAC This field displays the source MAC address of the ARP packet Sender IP This field displays the source IP address of the ARP packet Num Pkts This field displays the number of ARP packets that were consolidated into this log message The Switch consolidates identical log messages generated by ARP packets in the log consolidation interval into one log message You can configure this interval in the ARP I nspection Configure screen See Section 24 7 on page 216 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Table 91 ARP Inspection Log Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Reason This field displays the reason the log message was generated dhcp deny An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a dynamic binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID static deny An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID deny An ARP packet was discarded because there were no bindings with the same MAC address and VLAN ID dhcp permit An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a dynamic binding static permit An ARP packet was forwarded because it
89. confirmation Edit Logins You may configure passwords for up to four users These users have read only access You can give users higher privileges via the CLI For more information on assigning privileges see the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide User Name Set a user name up to 32 ASCII characters long Password Enter your new system password Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control 36 5 Service Access Control Overview This section introduces some of the services you can use to access and manage the Switch 36 5 1 SSH Unlike Telnet or FTP which transmit data in clear text SSH Secure Shell is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network Figure 172 SSH Communication Example TRS Internet SSH Server ae Sa SSH Client The following table summarizes how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts Figure 173 How SSH Works T Internet E
90. defines XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 10 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory a VLAN P GVRP Port Ingress Check 1 O 1 2 3 ed on Subnet Based Vian PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type Al m gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status VLAN runking Isolation O O Li Li O O O O O O O O 11 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently 2 2 3 Configuring DHCP Relay Follow the steps below to enable DHCP relay on the Switch and allow the Switch to add relay agent information such as the VLAN ID to DHCP requests 1 Click IP Application gt DHCP and then the Global link to open the DHCP Relay screen 2 Select the Active check box 3 Enter the DHCP server s IP address 192 168 2 3 in this example in the Remote DHCP Server 1 field 4 Select the Option 82 and the Information check boxes 5 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory D DHCP Relay Active Remote DHCP Server 1 Remote DHCP Server 2 Remote DHCP Server 3 Relay Agent Information Information v 192 168 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 vi Option 82 v XS3900 Status XS3900 48F
91. edit the entry later Server Address Enter the IP address of the syslog server Log Level Select the severity level s of the logs that you want the device to send to this syslog server The lower the number the more critical the logs are Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to return the fields to the factory defaults Index This is the index number of a syslog server entry Click this number to edit the entry Active This field displays Yes if the device is to send logs to the syslog server No displays if the device is not to send logs to the syslog server IP Address This field displays the IP address of the syslog server Log Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server Delete Select an entry s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide Cluster Management This chapter introduces cluster management 39 1 Clustering Management Status Overview Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one Switch called the cluster manager The switches mu
92. gt AAA gt AAA Setup Authentication Type Login Authorization Type Exec Dot1x Accounting Update Period Type System Exec Dotix Commands a OE EST Privilege Enable AAA Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 local y y local y y Active Method O radius lo minutes Active Broadcast Mode Method Privilege O rH radius y n m start stop Y radius O m start stop Y radius v O D stop only tacacs Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 76 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup LABEL Authentication DESCRIPTION Use this section to specify the methods used to authenticate users accessing the Switch Privilege Enable These fields specify which database the Switch should use first second and third to authenticate access privilege level for administrator accounts users for Switch management Configure the access privilege of accounts via commands see the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide for local authentication The TACACS and RADIUS are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate the access privilege level of administrators The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Method 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in the
93. gt LACP Active System Priority 65535 Link Aggregation Control Protoco Link Aggregation Setting Group ID LACP Active T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 d ume Lom o seu e ue T al Mr M aa ME NECARE titel d Port LACP Timeout 30 Y seconds 1 30 seconds 2 30 seconds 3 30 seconds 30 Y seconds 5 30 seconds 6 30 seconds Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 48 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP LABEL DESCRIPTION Link Aggregation Control Protocol Active Note Do not configure this screen unless you want to enable dynamic link aggregation Select this checkbox to enable Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP XS3900 48F User s Guide 137 Chapter 15 Link Aggregation Table 48 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION System LACP system priority is a number between 1 and 65 535 The switch with the lowest system Priority priority and lowest port number if system priority is the same becomes the LACP server The LACP server controls the operation of LACP setup Enter a number to set the priority of an active port using Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP The smaller the
94. in the European Union you would select Last Sunday March and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the last Sunday of October Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select First Sunday November and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday October and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 6 4 Introduction to VLANs A VLAN Virtual Local Ar
95. in the VLAN Group ID field Select Fixed to configure port 2 to be a permanent member of this VLAN Clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 7 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off ximus ACTIVE v VERN 102 VLAN Status Name VLAN Group ID VLAN Type O Private 1M Association VLAN List Port Control Tagging Norma v Tx Tagging 1 Norma O Fixed Forbidden v Tx Tagging 2 O Norma O Fixed O Forbidden O Tx Tagging 3 9 Norma O Fixed O Forbidden v Tx Tagging E 9 Norma O Fixed O Forbidden v Tx Tagging 5 O Norma O Fixed O Forbidden v Tx Tagging 6 Norma O Fixed O Forbidden v Tx Tagging 7 Norma O Fixed O Forbidden v Tx Tagaina Y 8 9 Norma OE O Forbidden aagi ales 8 Click the VLAN Status link in the Static VLAN screen and then the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen Y tatus VLAN Port Setting Private VLAN Status Static VLAN VLAN Search by VID Search The Number of VLAN 2 Index VID Elapsed Time Status 4 1 333 42 10 Static 2 102 0 00 49 Static Change Pages 9 Enter 102 in the PVID field for port 2 to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag
96. information Chapter 34 on page 263 to DHCP requests that the Switch relays to a DHCP server for each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application I P Source Guard DHCP Snooping Configure VLAN Figure 113 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure ED DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure Configure Show VLAN Start VID End VID Apply VID Enabled Option82 information es No C E Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 88 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Table 88 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Enabled Select Yes to enable DHCP snooping on the VLAN You still have to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch and specify trusted ports Note The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports Option82 Select this to have the Switch add the
97. is 890 Vendor Type A vendor specified attribute identifying the setting you want to modify Vendor data A value you want to assign to the setting Note Refer to the documentation that comes with your RADIUS server on how to configure VSAs for users authenticating via the RADIUS server XS3900 48F User s Guide 195 Chapter 23 AAA The following table describes the VSAs supported on the Switch Note that these attributes only work when you enable authorization see Section 23 2 3 on page 193 Table 77 Supported VSAs FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE Ingress Bandwidth Vendor Id 890 Assignment Vendor Type 1 Vendor data ingress rate Kbps in decimal format Egress Bandwidth Assignment Vendor Id 890 Vendor Type 2 Vendor data egress rate Kbps in decimal format Privilege Assignment Vendor ID 890 Vendor Type 3 Vendor Data shell priv lvlzN or Vendor ID 9 CISCO Vendor Type 1 CISCO AVPAIR Vendor Data shell priv lvlzN where N is a privilege level from 0 to 14 Note If you set the privilege level of a login account differently on the RADIUS server s and the Switch the user is assigned a privilege level from the database RADIUS or local the Switch uses first for user authentication 23 2 5 Tunnel Protocol Attribute You can configure tunnel protocol attributes on the RADIUS server refer to your RADIUS server documentation to assign a port on the Swi
98. is it deactivated Port This field displays the number of the port to which this rule is applied VID This is the VLAN ID number to which the port belongs Limit Number This is the maximum number of MAC addresses which a port can learn in a VLAN Delete Cancel Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox es in the Delete column XS3900 48F User s Guide Classifier This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the packet classifier on the Switch 18 1 About the Classifier and QoS Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth Without QoS all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time critical application such as video on demand A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address destination address source port number destination port number or incoming port number For example you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port such as Telnet to form a flow Configure QoS on the Switch to group and prioritize application traffic and fine tune network performance Setting up QoS invo
99. is sent when more than 99 of the MAC table is used MacTableFullEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 2 This trap is sent when less than 95 of the MAC table is used rmon RmonRisingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 1 This trap is sent when a variable goes over the RMON rising threshold RmonFallingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 2 This trap is sent when the variable falls below the RMON falling threshold cfm dotlagCfmFaultAlarm 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 0 1 The trap is sent when the Switch detects a connectivity fault XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control 36 3 4 Configuring SNMP From the Access Control screen display the SNMP screen You can click Access Control to go back to the Access Control screen Figure 168 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP v2c v2c v2c v2c Version v v v Trap Destination EIU General Setting Version v2c d nmunity public Set Community public Trap Community public IP Port Username 0 0 0 0 162 0 0 0 0 162 0 0 0 0 162 0 0 0 0 162 Access Control Trap Group User Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 135 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION General Setting Use this section to specify the SNMP version and community password values Version Get Community Select the SNMP version for the Switch The SNMP version on the Switch must match the version on the
100. is shown next The CPU management port forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports 7 6 1 Configure a Port based VLAN Select Port Based as the VLAN Type in the Switch Setup screen and then click VLAN from the navigation panel to display the following screen Select either All Connected or Port Isolated from the drop down list depending on your VLAN and VLAN security requirements If VLAN members need to communicate directly with each other then select All Connected Select Port I solated if you want to restrict users from communicating directly Click Apply to save your settings XS3900 48F User s Guide EB Incoming App Portisolation v v v v v v E ce mme e I Y v v f I v v v f s XS3900 48F User s Guide I mE e f lt
101. key to enter debug mode within 3 seconds Enter Debug Mode ras atlc Starting XMODEM upload CRC mode CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Total 393216 bytes received Erasing ras atgo The Switch is now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default password of 1234 KN XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 4 7 Logging Out of the Web Configurator Click Logout in a screen to exit the web configurator You have to log in with your password again after you log out This is recommended after you finish a management session for security reasons Figure 19 Web Configurator Logout Screen i Thank you for using the Web Configurator Please close the browser before next login Goodbye 4 8 Help The web configurator s online help has descriptions of individual screens and some supplementary information Click the Help link from a web configurator screen to view an online help description of that screen XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator XS3900 48F User s Guide PART II once System Status and Port Statistics This chapter describes the system status web configurator home page and port details screens 5 1 Overview The home screen of the web configurator displays a port statistical summary with links to each port showing statistical details 5 2 Port Status Summary To view the port statistics click St
102. matched a static binding In the ARP Inspection VLAN Configure screen you can configure the Switch to generate log messages when ARP packets are discarded or forwarded based on the VLAN ID of the ARP packet See Section 24 7 2 on page 219 Time This field displays when the log message was generated 24 7 ARP Inspection Configure Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You can also configure the length of time the Switch stores records of discarded ARP packets and global settings for the ARP inspection log To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure Figure 117 ARP Inspection Configure Filter Aging Time Filter aging time Log Profile Log buffer size Syslog rate Log interval ARP Inspection Configure Port VLAN ARP Inspection Active E 300 seconds 32 entries 5 entries n seconds Apply Cancel XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 92 ARP Inspection Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You still have to enable ARP inspection on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports Filter Aging Time Filter aging time This setting has no effect on existing MAC address filters Enter how long 1 2147483647 seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch after the Swit
103. memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 24 5 1 DHCP Snooping Port Configure Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for DHCP snooping Note The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP packets that each port trusted or untrusted can receive each second To open this screen click Advanced Application IP Source Guard DHCP Snooping Configure Port Figure 112 DHCP Snooping Port Configure ES DACP Snooping Port Configure P Configure Port Server Trusted state Rate pps Untrusted z Untrusted z b o o 2 Untrusted z O 3 Untrusted z bo 4 Untrusted z o o 2 Untrusted z o o o 7 Untrusted z o qe t L Apply Cancel XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 87 DHCP Snooping Port Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number If you configure the port the settings are applied to all of the ports Server Trusted state Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted
104. must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the Advanced Applications VLAN screens Priority Select the priority level that the Switch assigns to frames belonging to this VLAN Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Index This is the index number identifying this subnet based VLAN Click on any of these numbers to edit an existing subnet based VLAN Active This field shows whether the subnet based VLAN is active or not Name This field shows the name the subnet based VLAN IP This field shows the IP address of the subnet for this subnet based VLAN Mask Bits This field shows the subnet mask in bit number format for this subnet based VLAN VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the frames which belong to this subnet based VLAN Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this subnet based VLAN Delete Click this to delete the subnet based VLANs which you marked for deletion Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 7 5 6 Protocol Based VLANs Protocol based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the protocol you specify When an up
105. not match any of the current bindings The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high 24 1 2 2 DHCP Snooping Database The Switch stores the binding table in volatile memory If the Switch restarts it loads static bindings from permanent memory but loses the dynamic bindings in which case the devices in the network have to send DHCP requests again As a result it is recommended you configure the DHCP snooping database XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard The DHCP snooping database maintains the dynamic bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection in a file on an external TFTP server If you set up the DHCP snooping database the Switch can reload the dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database after the Switch restarts You can configure the name and location of the file on the external TFTP server The file has the following format Figure 106 DHCP Snooping Database File Format lt initial checksum gt TYPE DHCP SNOOP ING VERSION 1 BEGIN lt binding 1 gt lt checksum 1 gt lt binding 2 gt lt checksum 1 2 gt lt binding n gt lt checksum 1 2 n gt END The lt initial checksum gt helps distinguish between the bindings in the latest update and the bindings from previous updates Each binding consists of 72 bytes a space and another checksum that is used to validate the binding when it is read If the calculated checksum is not equal to the checksum in the file
106. number the higher the priority level Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports LACP Active Select this option to enable LACP for a trunk Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them LACP Timeout Timeout is the time interval between the individual port exchanges of LACP packets in order to check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up If a port does not respond after three tries then it is deemed to be down and is removed from the trunk Set a short timeout one second for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk group as soon as possible Select either 1 second or 30 seconds Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 15 6 Static Trunking Example This example shows you how to create a static port trunk group for ports
107. of ARP Request packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Reply This field displays the total number of ARP Reply packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Forwarded This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch forwarded for the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Dropped This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch discarded for the VLAN since the Switch last restarted 24 6 2 ARP Inspection Log Status Use this screen to look at log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Log Status Figure 116 ARP Inspection Log Status Clearing log status table Total number of logs 0 ARP Inspection Log Status Status Index Port VID Sender MAC Sender IP Num Pkts Reason Time Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 91 ARP Inspection Log Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Clearing log status table Total number of logs Click Apply to remove all the log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet This field displays the number of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet If one or more log messages are dropped due to unavailable
108. port s or allow the packets on a port manually via the web configurator or the commands With error disable recovery you can set the disabled port s to become active or start receiving the packets again after the time interval you specify XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 30 Error Disable 30 3 The Error Disable Screen Use this screen to configure error disable related settings Click Advanced Application gt Errdisable in the navigation panel to open the following screen Figure 139 Advanced Application gt Errdisable Errdisable CPU protection Click here Errdisable Detect Click here Errdisable Recovery Click here 30 4 CPU Protection Configuration Use this screen to limit the maximum number of control packets ARP BPDU and or IGMP that the Switch can receive or transmit on a port Click the Click Here link next to CPU protection in the Advanced Application gt Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown Note After you configure this screen make sure you also enable error detection for the specific control packets in the Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Detect screen Figure 140 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt CPU protection CPU protection J Errdisable Reason ARP Port Rate Limit pkt s oO NM Co Cn 4 CO Nh eioIicoicolIicolcolHlcl i coc XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 30 Error Disable The following table describ
109. response from the first TACACS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second TACACS server Index This is a read only number representing a TACACS server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS server in dotted decimal notation TCP Port The default port of a TACACS server for authentication is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 23 AAA Table 75 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Use this section to configure your TACACS accounting settings Server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the
110. root switch This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the MST instance XS3900 48F User s Guide Bandwidth Control This chapter shows you how you can cap the maximum bandwidth using the Bandwidth Control screen 12 1 Bandwidth Control Overview Bandwidth control means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and or out going traffic flows on a port 12 1 1 CIR and PIR The Committed Information Rate CIR is the guaranteed bandwidth for the incoming traffic flow on a port The Peak Information Rate PIR is the maximum bandwidth allowed for the incoming traffic flow on a port when there is no network congestion The CIR and PIR should be set for all ports that use the same uplink bandwidth If the CIR is reached packets are sent at the rate up to the PIR When network congestion occurs packets through the ingress port exceeding the CIR will be marked for drop Note The CIR should be less than the PIR Note The sum of CIRs cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth XS3900 48F User s Guide 125 Chapter 12 Bandwidth Control 12 2 Bandwidth Control Setup Click Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control in the navigation panel to bring up the screen as shown next Figure 61 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control COD Bandwidth Control 7 Active em Ingress Rate Act E Rat E Active Co
111. root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a configuration second message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding Delay second This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Topology Changed Times This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 11 8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MSTP click MSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Section 11 1 5 on page 109 for more information on MSTP Figure 58 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protoco Port Status Bridge Active Hello Time 2 seconds MAX Age 20 secon
112. rule to all MAC addresses Address To specify a destination select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs Layer 3 Specify the fields below to configure a layer 3 classifier DSCP Select Any to classify traffic from any DSCP or select the second option and specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 in the field provided IP Select an IP protocol type or select Other and enter the protocol number in decimal value Refer Protocol to Table 57 on page 155 for more information You may select Establish Only for TCP protocol type This means that the Switch will pick out the packets that are sent to establish TCP connections Source IP Enter a source IP address in dotted decimal notation Address i Address Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask Prefix dm Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Destination IP Enter a destination IP address in dotted decimal notation Address i Address Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask Prefix AA Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket
113. screen Table 24 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate this subnet based VLANs on the Switch DHCP Vlan When DHCP snooping is enabled DHCP clients can renew their IP address through the DHCP Override VLAN or via another DHCP server on the subnet based VLAN Select this checkbox to force the DHCP clients in this IP subnet to obtain their IP addresses through the DHCP VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Active Select this check box to activate the IP subnet VLAN you are creating or editing Name Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters to identify this subnet based VLAN IP Enter the IP address of the subnet for which you want to configure this subnet based VLAN Mask Bits Enter the bit number of the subnet mask To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary format and add all the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1s in binary There are three 255s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 VID Enter the ID of a VLAN with which the untagged frames from the IP subnet specified in this subnet based VLAN are tagged This
114. slot number port number and VLAN ID to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 24 5 on page 209 Information Select this to have the Switch add the system name to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN You can configure the system name in the General Setup screen See Chapter 6 on page 70 You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 24 5 on page 209 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 24 6 ARP Inspection Use this screen to look at the current list of MAC address filters that were created because the Switch identified an unauthorized ARP packet When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection Figure 114 ARP Inspection Status Total number of filters 0 Index MAC Address a ESS EEE VLAN Status Log Status C
115. src dst mac T9 src dst mac T10 src dst mac The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Group ID This field displays the group ID to identify a trunk group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Enabled Port These are the ports you have configured in the Link Aggregation screen to be in the trunk group The port number s displays only when this trunk group is activated and there is a port belonging to this group 1 Port Priority and Port Number are 0 as it is the aggregator ID for the trunk group not the individual port XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 15 Link Aggregation Table 46 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Synchronized These are the ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link in this trunk Ports group Aggregator ID Link Aggregator ID consists of the following system priority MAC address key port priority and port number Refer to Section 15 2 1 on page 133 for more information on this field The ID displays only when there is a port belonging to this trunk group and LACP is also enabled for this group Criteria This shows the outgoing traffic distribution algorithm used in this trunk group Packets from the same source and or to the same destination are sent over the same link
116. the DHCP snooping database unsuccessfully This section displays historical information about the number of times the Switch successfully or unsuccessfully read or updated the DHCP snooping database Total attempts This field displays the number of times the Switch has tried to access the DHCP snooping database for any reason Startup failures This field displays the number of times the Switch could not create or read the DHCP snooping database when the Switch started up or a new URL is configured for the DHCP snooping database Successful transfers This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from or updated the bindings in the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed transfers This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from or update the bindings in the DHCP snooping database Successful reads This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed reads This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from the DHCP snooping database Successful writes This field displays the number of times the Switch updated the bindings in the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed writes This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to update the bindings in the DHCP snooping database Database detail First successful
117. the Switch waits for an accounting request response from the RADIUS accounting server Index This is a read only number representing a RADIUS accounting server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS accounting server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS accounting server for accounting is 1813 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 23 AAA 23 2 2 TACACS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your TACACS server settings See Section 23 1 2 on page 188 for more information on TACACS servers Click on the TACACS Server Setup link in the Authenticati
118. the middle attacks such as the one in the following example Figure 107 Example Man in the middle Attack In this example computer B tries to establish a connection with computer A Computer X is in the same broadcast domain as computer A and intercepts the ARP request for computer A Then computer X does the following things t pretends to be computer A and responds to computer B t pretends to be computer B and sends a message to computer A As a result all the communication between computer A and computer B passes through computer X Computer X can read and alter the information passed between them 24 1 3 1 ARP Inspection and MAC Address Filters When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet You can configure how long the MAC address filter remains in the Switch These MAC address filters are different than regular MAC address filters Chapter 10 on page 105 They are stored only in volatile memory They do not use the same space in memory that regular MAC address filters use They appear only in the ARP Inspection screens and commands not in the MAC Address Filter screens and commands 24 1 3 2 Trusted vs Untrusted Ports Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for ARP inspection This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for
119. the ports which Port are going to have the same attributes as the source port You can enter individual ports separated by a comma or a range of ports by using a dash Example e 2 4 6 indicates that ports 2 4 and 6 are the destination ports 2 6 indicates that ports 2 through 6 are the destination ports Basic Setting Select which port settings configured in the Basic Setting menus should be copied to the destination port s Advanced Select which port settings configured in the Advanced Application menus should be Application copied to the destination ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter The potential problems are divided into the following categories Power Hardware Connections and LEDs Switch Access and Login Switch Configuration 43 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDs The Switch does not turn on None of the LEDs turn on 1 Make sure the Switch is turned on 2 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the Switch 3 Make sure the pow
120. the same VLAN group are not visible in the Clustering Candidates list This field is ignored if the Clustering Manager is using Port based VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clustering The following fields relate to the switches that are potential cluster members Candidate List A list of suitable candidates found by auto discovery is shown here The switches must be directly connected Directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Switches that are not in the same management VLAN group will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Password Each cluster member s password is its web configurator password Select a member in the Clustering Candidate list and then enter its web configurator password If that switch administrator changes the web configurator password afterwards then it cannot be managed from the Cluster Manager Its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen If multiple devices have the same password then hold SHIFT and click those switches to select them Then enter their common web configurator password Add C
121. the specified VID XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 7 VLAN You also use the Static VLAN screen to create VLAN IDs for static normal or private primary isolated or community VLANs 7 5 1 VLAN Status See Section 7 1 on page 81 for more information on 802 1Q VLAN Click Advanced Application gt VLAN from the navigation panel to display the VLAN Status screen as shown next Figure 29 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status OMEN VLAN Port Setting Private VLAN Status Static VLAN VLAN Search by VID Search The Number of VLAN 5 Index VID Elapsed Time Status 1 26 36 55 Static 2 50 2 03 39 Private 3 51 2 17 16 Private 4 52 2 16 56 Private 5 53 2 14 31 Private Change Pages Previous Next The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status LABEL VLAN Search by VID The Number of VLAN DESCRIPTION Enter an existing VLAN ID number s separated by a comma and click Search to display only the specified VLAN s in the list below Leave this field blank and click Search to display all VLANs configured on the Switch This is the number of VLANs configured on the Switch The Number of Search Results This is the number of VLANs that match the searching criteria and display in the list below This field displays only when you use the Search button to look for certain VLANs Index VID This is the VLAN inde
122. time Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 21 4 1 Port based Q in Q Port based Q in Q lets the Switch treat all frames received on the same port as the same VLAN flows and add the same outer VLAN tag to them even they have different customer VLAN IDs Click Port based QinQ in the Advanced Application VLAN Stacking screen to display the screen as shown Figure 87 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Port based QinQ OLDS aD VLAN Stacking Port SPVID Priority asses 07 no 07 2 E d 07 3 ox 4 hp ga 5 NN o 6 may o s 7 g 8 A o 3 no o sj ee e A t gt scam Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 65 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Port based QinQ LABEL DESCRIPTION Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring SPVID SPVI D is the service provider s VLAN ID the outer VLAN tag Enter the service provider ID from 1 to 4094 for frames received on this port See Chapter 7 on page 81 for more background information on VLAN ID XS3900 48F User s Guide 169 Chapter
123. to in order to examine it in more detail without Port interfering with the traffic flow on the original port s Type the port number of the monitor port Port This field displays the port number XS3900 48F User s Guide 130 Chapter 14 Mirroring Table 43 Advanced Application gt Mirroring continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Mirrored Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port Direction Specify the direction of the traffic to mirror by selecting from the drop down list box Choices are Egress outgoing Ingress incoming and Both Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide Link Aggregation This chapter shows you how to logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher bandwidth link 15 1 Link Aggregation Overview Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of
124. to perform certain tasks no matter which screen you are currently working in B Click this link to save your configuration into the Switch s nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory is saved in the configuration file from which the Switch booted from and it stays the same even if the Switch s power is turned off See Section 35 3 on page 270 for information on saving your settings to a specific configuration file C Click this link to go to the status page of the Switch D Click this link to log out of the web configurator E Click this link to display web help pages The help pages provide descriptions for all of the configuration screens XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator In the navigation panel click a main link to reveal a list of submenu links Table 9 Navigation Panel Sub links Overview BASIC SETTING ADVANCED APPLICATION IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT Basic Setting Advanced Application IP Application Management System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup Port Setup Basic Setting RR nced Application ELE ut NN VLAN Static MAC Forwarding Static Multicast Forwarding Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Bandwidth Control Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Link Aggregation Basic Setting Advanced Application IP Application Managem Static Routing DiffServ DHCP Basic Setting Advanced Application IP Application Managem
125. want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without having to configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices The following figure describes VLAN Trunking Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 V1 and V2 on devices A and B Without VLAN Trunking you must configure VLAN groups 1 and 2 on all intermediary switches C D and E otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags However with VLAN Trunking enabled on a port s in each intermediary switch you only need to create VLAN groups in the end devices A and B C D and E automatically allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 VLAN groups that are unknown to those switches to pass through their VLAN trunking port s Figure 27 Port VLAN Trunking c E N v v2 Co vi v2 7 4 Select the VLAN Type Select a VLAN type in the Basic Setting gt Switch Setup screen Figure 28 Switch Setup Select VLAN Type a JENTECTIEND 2 802 10 VLAN Type O PortBased Dridao Contenl Dratacal Trancnarancu Actiua ET 7 5 802 1Q Static VLAN Make sure 802 1Q is selected in the Basic Setting Switch Setup screen Use a static VLAN to decide whether an incoming frame on a port should be sent to a VLAN group as normal depending on its VLAN tag sent to a group whether it has a VLAN tag or not blocked from a VLAN group regardless of its VLAN tag You can also tag all outgoing frames that were previously untagged from a port with
126. within the trunk src mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s source MAC address dst mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s destination MAC address src dst mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination MAC addresses src ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s source IP address dst ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s destination IP address src dst ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination IP addresses Status This field displays how these ports were added to the trunk group It displays Static if the ports are configured as static members of a trunk group e LACP if the ports are configured to join a trunk group via LACP XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 15 Link Aggregation 15 4 Link Aggregation Setting Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting to display the screen shown next See Section 15 1 on page 132 for more information on link aggregation Figure 65 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting Link Aggregation Setting Status LACP Group ID Active Criteria T1 src dst mac M T2 src dstmac M T3 src dst mac T4 src dst mac v T5 src dst ma
127. 0 1 5 8 74 31 2 2 This trap is sent when the RADIUS accounting server can be reached Table 133 SNMP IP Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION ping pingProbeFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 1 This trap is sent when a single ping probe fails pingTestFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 2 This trap is sent when a ping test consisting of a series of ping probes fails pingTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 3 This trap is sent when a ping test is completed traceroute traceRouteTestFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 2 This trap is sent when a traceroute test fails traceRouteTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 3 This trap is sent when a traceroute test is completed Table 134 SNMP Switch Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION stp STPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 This trap is sent when the STP root switch changes MRSTPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 35 2 1 This trap is sent when the MRSTP root switch changes MSTPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 107 7 This trap is sent when the MSTP root switch 0 1 changes STPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 This trap is sent when the STP topology changes MRSTPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 35 2 2 This trap is sent when the MRSTP topology changes MSTPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 107 7 This trap is sent when the MSTP root switch 0 2 changes mactable MacTableFullEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 1 This trap
128. 0000 0x0000 The following table Table 40 Advanced describes the labels in this screen Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click MSTP to edit MSTP settings on the Switch CST This section describes the Common Spanning Tree settings Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a configuration second message Max Age second This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding Delay second This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 40 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port ID
129. 02 1Q frame switching Select Access Port for ingress ports on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure The incoming frame is treated as untagged so a second VLAN tag outer VLAN tag can be added Note Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be disabled on a port where you choose Normal or Access Port Select Tunnel Port available for Gigabit ports only for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network All VLANs belonging to a customer can be aggregated into a single service provider s VLAN using the outer VLAN tag defined by the Service Provider s SP VLAN ID VID Note Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be enabled on a port where you choose Tunnel Port XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking 21 3 VLAN Tag Format A VLAN tag service provider VLAN stacking or customer IEEE 802 1Q consists of the following three fields Table 61 VLAN Tag Format Type Priority VID Type is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates that whether the frame carries IEEE 802 1Q tag information SP TPID Service Provider Tag Protocol Identifier is the service provider VLAN stacking tag type Many vendors use 0x8100 or 0x9100 TPI D Tag Protocol Identifier is the customer IEEE 802 1Q tag f the VLAN stacking port role is Access Port then the Switch adds the SP TPI D tag to all incoming frames on the service provider s edge devices 1 and
130. 07 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them 240 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 29 PPPoE Table 107 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Trusted State Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted Trusted ports are uplink ports connected to PPPoE servers e Ifa PADO PPPoE Active Discovery Offer PADS PPPoE Active Discovery Session confirmation or PADT PPPoE Active Discovery Terminate packet is sent from a PPPoE server and received on a trusted port the Switch forwards it to all other ports e Ifa PADI or PADR packet is sent from a PPPoE client but received on a trusted port the Switch forwards it to other trusted port s Untrusted ports are downlink ports connected to subscribers e Ifa PADI PADR or PADT packet is sent from a PPPoE client and received on an untrusted port the Switch adds a vendor specific tag to the packet and then forwards it to the trusted port s The Switch discards PADO and PADS packets which are sent from a PPPoE server but received on an untrusted port
131. 1 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Detect Errdisable Detect J Errdisable Cause Active Mode nacMepot E ARP O inactive port BPDU O inactive port v IGMP O inactive pot v The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 111 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Detect LABEL DESCRIPTION Cause This field displays the types of control packet that may cause CPU overload Use this row to make the setting the same for all entries Use this row first and then make adjustments to each entry if necessary Note Changes in this row are copied to all the entries as soon as you make them Active Select this option to have the Switch detect if the configured rate limit for a specific control packet is exceeded and take the action selected below 246 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 30 Error Disable Table 111 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Detect continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode Select the action that the Switch takes when the number of control packets exceed the rate limit on a port set in the Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt CPU protection screen e inactive port The Switch disables the port on which the control packets are received inactive reason The Switch bypasses the processing of the specified control packets such as ARP or IGMP packets or drops all the specified control pac
132. 15 alque OOEe 132 5 1 Ek Agarenadon CRO ni 132 152 Ren UMS Geiler MM PTT 132 LERNEN serere P 133 poa Wreeu eni secca Mem M P 133 15 4 Link AOOFeDONOEE ASNO sr 135 15 5 Link Apagregation Lanttol Protocol ea ni 137 IDG Stait Tino EXAMPIE e A 138 Chapter 16 eg Ann ee 140 TE Pom AMERICAS MERC Nr 140 181 1 IEEE S02 1x AMEN Mem n 140 1512 NAS Po DS EC ND cio a 141 162 Parr Aniennocsem anu cessen nea 142 TEE Aca EEE 802 IX SEGUI c 143 Ne NE E NT SS 144 16 23 Activate MAC ALISON qna 146 Chapter 17 uid ci c 148 XS3900 48F User s Guide Table of Contents IT ABOSUPON AAA e ond Sa ee nen aad naa 148 LES oec e TUE E ciis OTT eo pr 148 123 VLAN Rr eren MD M EET 150 Chapter 18 ju 151 18 1 OME TIG Chesiier DU QOS auiem A Ond dudas d moda d p nu 151 15 5 Donor gg His DISSI aia 151 18 3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration siii erret ias 154 ir erg cc canas S 156 Chapter 19 Policy 9 0 C DE O 157 191 Policy Rules vee ca a ia 157 IA MS rn EE T NUT 157 14 12 B36P and Pardon Bahrain iaa aaa 157 T9 CoD BE Pall Y Aes sin eA e 157 19 3 Viewing and Editing Polity CODDOUEABOB Lui ca tenenda tip ct aine g adu rk racc a da dk oa er RE d grt aai rada 160 194 pjiscgd coysg me e dsd 161 Cha
133. 21 VLAN Stacking Table 65 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Port based QinQ continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Priority Apply Select a priority level from O to 7 This is the service provider s priority level that adds to the frames received on this port 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 21 4 2 Selective Q in Q Selective Q in Q is VLAN based It allows the Switch to add different outer VLAN tags to the incoming frames received on one port according to their inner VLAN tags Note Selective Q in Q rules are only applied to single tagged frames received on the access ports If the incoming frames are untagged or single tagged but received on a tunnel port or cannot match any selective Q in Q rules the Switch applies the port based Q in Q rules to them Click Selective QinQ in the Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking screen to display the screen as shown Figure 88 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Selective QinQ Index ED Selective QNO g Active Name Add Cancel Active Name Port CVID SPVID Priority Delete D
134. 32 poll interval 233 sample rate 233 UDP port 234 sFlow agent 232 sFlow collector 232 sfp plus 79 SFP 49 XS3900 48F User s Guide Index SFP Direct Attach Copper DAC 79 SFP ports transceiver removal 50 Simple Network Management Protocol see SNMP SNMP 24 276 agent 277 and MIB 277 authentication 285 communities 282 management model 277 manager 277 MIB 278 network components 277 object variables 277 protocol operations 277 security 284 285 setup 282 traps 283 users 284 version 3 and security 277 versions supported 276 SNMP traps 278 supported 278 280 281 Spanning Tree Protocol See STP 107 SPQ Strict Priority Queuing 163 SSH encryption methods 288 how it works 287 implementation 288 SSH Secure Shell 287 SSL Secure Socket Layer 288 standby ports 132 static bindings 200 static MAC address 99 static MAC forwarding 90 92 99 static multicast address 101 static multicast forwarding 101 static route configuration 254 static routes 255 static trunking example 138 Static VLAN 86 static VLAN control 87 tagging 87 status 65 LED 52 link aggregation 133 port 65 port details 66 power 71 STP 114 117 123 VLAN 84 STP 107 231 bridge ID 115 118 bridge priority 113 116 configuration 113 116 119 designated bridge 108 forwarding delay 114 117 Hello BPDU 108 Hello Time 113 115 117 118 how it works 108 Max Age 114 115 117 118 path cost 107 114 117 port priority 114 117 port stat
135. 48F User s Guide 317 Appendix A Common Services Table 152 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICMP User Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic or routing purposes ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IGMP MULTICAST User Defined 2 Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING User Defined 1 Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other PPTP TC
136. 5 56 63 IEEE 802 1p 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 33 4 1 Configuring DSCP Settings To change the DSCP IEEE 802 1p mapping click the DSCP Setting link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 152 P Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting a PENES Diffserv DSCP to 802 1p Mapping ofo 1 0 7 20 a o afo 5 0 sfo 7 0 7 ha did ad whe aia ad ist si 16 2 y 17 2 18 2 y 19 2 y 20 2 y 2112 22 2 y 23 2 24 3 y 25 3 y 26 3 y 2713 28 3 y 2913 y 30 3 31138 32 4 y 33 4 y 34 4 y 35 4 y 36 4 y 3714 y 38 4 v 39 4 v 4015 y 4115 y 4215 y 43 5 y 4415 y 45 5 y 4615 y 47 5 y 48 6 y 49 6 y 50 6 y 5116 y 5216 y 53 6 y 5416 y 55 6 y 56 y 57 7 y 58 y 59 y 60 y 6117 y 62 y 63 y Apply Cancel XS3900 48F User s Guide EB Chapter 33 Differentiated Services The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 120 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION 0 63 This is the DSCP classification identification number To set the IEEE 802 1p priority mapping select the priority level from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Ca
137. 9 Policy Rule Click Advanced Applications gt Policy Rule in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 81 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule ES Policy Active F Name Classifier s General Metering Bandwidth Kbps Out of Profile Egress Port 1 RE Parameters d Priority 0v DSCP TOS 0 w Forwarding No change Discard the packet Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Priority No change O Setthe packet s 802 1p priority Send the packet to priority queue Replace the 802 1p priority field with the IP TOS value Diffserv 9 No change Action O Setthe packets TOS field Replace the IP TOS field with the 802 1p priority value O Set the Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Outgoing C Send the packet to the mirror port C Send the packet to the egress port Metering O Enable C Drop the packet Out of profile C Change the DSCP value action O Set Out Drop Precedence C Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable the policy Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 19 Policy Rule Table 58 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Classifier
138. 900 48F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator The following figure shows the navigating components of a web configurator screen Figure 16 The Web Configurator Layout ZyXEL Save Status 3 Logout H Help MERU ae Basic Setting Port Status f Advanced Application Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors Bis is Uu IP Application 1 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Management 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 E 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 uU 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 6 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 y Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 uU 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 9 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 a Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 12 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 13 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 14 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 15 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 16 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 17 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 18 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 19 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Iv O Any O Pot ZyXEL Communications Corp A Click the menu items to open submenu links and then click on a submenu link to open the screen in the main window B C D E These are quick links which allow you
139. AA A 215 22 37 ARP Inspeccion COMU a ER 216 EA ARP Inspection Port COn aedes rd p Dara vnc E P Presa t D eR 217 24 C2 ARP Inspection VLAN Csr UNG canina 219 Chapter 25 MNES 220 USPS ua MUSAS CEN 220 2 LoSD DOSE AU e ed UE 222 Chapter 26 VLAN Mapping serias A di 224 261 VLAN Mapping CUBO E 224 CON ad VLAN Mappmg EEN e E 224 re EMRO LAN een tc 225 25 BOM YECAN MEP uua in preter agenda a i P pb E box 226 Chapter 27 Layer 2 Protocol A iaa aaiae raaa aiana Eae 228 27 1 Layer Protocol Tunneling OVeniewW ios 228 27 1 1 Layer Protocol Tunneling Mod cctv idas 229 27 2 COMU Layer 2 Protocol DUBIO coi aana aaae ia aaoun addat ceca 230 Chapter 28 POW 232 MEC QUIS 01 ew RR 232 Pee Srila PIT Conia O air adea pelea P oia aa cla 233 20 2 1 SFW Colector Lapi guid Of di 234 Chapter 29 A 236 29 1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Overview esee nerd tsaneeaeensianeteestnes 236 28 1 1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Tag Formal sucssrccnanissi oso kd snc 236 291 2 nS eidrej ae 236 Ge WNT MU MU IINE 237 edes The Pie SIOISBI rain 238 290 PPPOE imermedalo AGONI bm 238 A anda a ra rv bu Ru SEEE 240 cd Pro Praise OF FOr VLAN iia 241 ERO os lel ale wel ges eh a erent rr ei etree Teter re Tet rd e rere rere ere rere tree 243 Chapter 30 Error dh
140. ABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Select a multicast VLAN ID that you configured in the MVR screen from the drop down list VLAN ID box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes Start Address Enter the starting IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Refer to Section 22 1 1 on page 172 for more information on IP multicast addresses End Address Enter the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Enter the same IP address as the Start Address field if you want to configure only one IP address for a multicast group Refer to Section 22 1 1 on page 172 for more information on IP multicast addresses Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MVLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Start Address This field displays the starting IP address of the multicast group End Address This field displays the ending IP address of the multicast group Delete Select Delete All or Delete Group and click Delete to remove the selected entry ies from the table Cancel Select Cancel to clear the
141. AN ID in the binding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports 24 3 Static Binding Use this screen to manage static bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection Static bindings are uniquely identified by the MAC address and VLAN ID Each MAC address and VLAN ID can only be in one static binding If you try to create a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID as an existing static binding the new static binding replaces the original one To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt Static Binding Figure 109 P Source Guard Static Binding a ESE NEN IPSG MAC Address IP Address VLAN Port any Add Cancel Clear Index MAC Address IP Address Lease Type VLAN Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 84 P Source Guard Static Binding LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Enter the source MAC address in the binding IP Address Enter the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding VLAN Enter the source VLAN ID in the binding Port Specify the port s in the binding If this binding has one port select the first radio button and enter the port number in the field to the right If this binding applies to all ports select Any Add Click this to create the specified static binding or to update an existing
142. ASCII characters spaces are allowed Contact Person s Name Use Time Server when Bootup Type the name of the person in charge of this Switch You can use up to 32 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed Type the time service protocol that your timeserver uses Not all time servers support all protocols so you may have to use trial and error to find a protocol that works The main differences between them are the time format When you select the Daytime RFC 867 format the Switch displays the day month year and time with no time zone adjustment When you use this format it is recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 None is the default value Enter the time manually Each time you turn on the Switch the time and date will be reset to 1970 1 1 0 0 Time Server IP Address Type the IP address of your timeserver The Switch searches for the timeserver for up to 60 seconds If you select a timeserver that is unreachable then this screen will appear locked for 60 seconds Please wait XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 6 Basic Setting Table 14 Basic Setting gt General Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Time This field displays the time you open this menu or refresh the menu
143. B 3 iv E Y v v ez III v v v mmm e v v v ze MAR E Ivi v vi a fttt E v v v AMMO a v 33 aram BEBE e e e POBRE e e e FAA E n B B Bl ram ee earam e ee 1 a a e e MEE a f 2 i v iv mmi E i iv iv me s h El Bl gt 5 gt gt gt El bl e El Bl gt 5 gt 5 gt El El 2 bl El gt 5 5 3 5 iv v v v ez t E v v v fta v Y v v f 38 a a ea eaea ez e v fat eue fatta gg gm bl 2 el bl gt gt 3 gt gt El el el al el gt gt 5 gt gt Iv Iv vi v a aa v iv v E e ad Bl bl gt gt gt gt iv v v Iv ajala Ia iv v v ez III E v v v z mate v v v mm MA e v v vi mme v i Iv iv mmi e i iv iv mig e EIE ee ettari ee ev eat eg mE sse gsm s e ME Cap ca ca ca ca E v v v m v v v rater E Y 35 em guid Iv EI v Iv E 1 v V I v1 v v v v V v Iv v v Iv v v v V Aep
144. C Temperature C Current MAX MIN Threshold Status CPU 37 0 37 0 36 0 80 0 Normal MAC 45 0 45 0 43 0 90 0 Normal PHY1 48 0 48 0 46 0 90 0 Normal PHY2 49 0 49 0 47 0 90 0 Normal FAN Speed RPM Current MAX MIN Threshold Status FAN1 9360 12960 9360 500 Normal FAN2 9480 12840 9360 500 Normal FAN3 9360 12960 9360 500 Normal FAN4 9480 12960 9360 500 Normal Voltage V Current MAX MIN Threshold Status 12V PSU1 11 616 11 797 11 616 10 Normal 12V_PSU2 11 676 11 797 11 676 10 Normal XS3900 48F User s Guide 70 Chapter 6 Basic Setting The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 13 Basic Setting gt System Info LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name This field displays the descriptive name of the Switch for identification purposes Product Model This field displays the model number of the Switch ZyNOS F W This field displays the version number of the Switch s current firmware including the date Version created Ethernet This field refers to the Ethernet MAC Media Access Control address of the Switch Address Hardware Monitor Temperature The Switch has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and reporting if the Unit temperature rises above the threshold You may choose the temperature unit Centigrade or Fahrenheit in this field Temperature CPU PHY and MAC refer to the location of the temperature sensors on the Switch printed circuit board
145. CP VLAN as shown Click Apply LE DHCP Snooping Configure Port VLAN DHCP Snooping Active Iv SERA C Disable an 100 Database Agent URL Timeout interval o0 seconds Write delay interval oo seconds Renew DHCP Snooping URL Renew Apply Cancel 5 Click the Port link at the top right corner 6 The DHCP Snooping Port Configure screen appears m VLAN DHCP Snooping Select Trusted in the Server Trusted state field for port 5 because the DHCP server is connected to port 5 Keep ports 6 and 7 Untrusted because they are connected to DHCP clients Click Apply Port Server Trusted state Untrusted Untrusted y Untrusted y Untrusted Untrusted y Untrusted y Untrusted y o fa 0o mn fa oimn Untrusted y EE DHCP Snooping Port Configure Configure Rate pps TTT XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 7 Goto Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP snooping gt Configure gt VLAN show VLAN 100 by entering 100 in the Start VID and End VID fields and click Apply Then select Yes in the Enabled field of the VLAN 100 entry shown at the bottom section of the screen If you want to add more information in the DHCP request packets such as source VLAN ID or system name you can also select the Option82 and Information fields in the entry See Section 24 1 2 3 on page 202 A As Snooping
146. Cluster Management configurator home page This cluster member web configurator home page and the home page that you d see if you accessed it directly are different Figure 188 Cluster Management Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen ZyXEL Save Status El Logout H Help MENU 00 0 Basic Setting AP AR Member Menu Advanced Application IP Application Basic Setting Advanced Application IP Application Management Management System Info VLAN Static Routing Access Control gt Sees General Setup Static MAC DiffServ Diagnostic Switch Setup Forwarding DHCP Syslog IP Setup Filtering MAC Table Port Setup Spanning Tree ARP Table Protocol Configure Clone Diagnostic Bandwidth Control Port Status Syslog Broadcast Storm Save Cluster Management Control MAC Table p 5 ink Aggregation m0 Port Authentication er Table Port Security Routing Table Queuing Method Configure Clone Multicast Auth and Acct IP Source Guard Loop Guard 39 2 1 1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch You can use FTP to upload firmware to a cluster member switch through the cluster manager switch as shown in the following example Figure 189 Example Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch C gt ftp 192 168 1 1 Connected to 192 168 1 1 220 Switch FTP version 1 0 ready at Thu Jan User 192 168 0 1 none admin 1 00 58 46 1970 331 Enter PASS command Password 230 Logged in ftp ls 200 Port comm
147. DA Destination Address Priority 802 1p Priority SA Source Address Len Length and type of Ethernet frame Etype XS3900 48F User s Guide 167 Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking Table 63 802 1Q Frame SP TPID Service Provider Tag Protocol IDentifier Data Frame data VID VLAN ID FC un Frame Check Sequence 21 4 Configuring VLAN Stacking Click Advanced Applications gt VLAN Stacking to display the screen as shown Figure 86 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking A ORBVENEROIDEEEEENNND Portbased QinQ Selective QinQ Active E Port Role Tunnel TPID Normal y 1 Normal 8100 2 Normal y 8100 3 Normal 8100 4 Normal 8100 5 Normal 8100 SA ASA 1 A Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this checkbox to enable VLAN stacking on the Switch Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Role Select Normal to have the Switch ignore frames received or transmitted on thi
148. DCB Configuration You should configure DCB on any port that has both Ethernet and FCoE traffic 1 2 2 1 DCB Only Do the following if you re just using DCB that is switches don t need to know DCB related configurations via DCBX ETS Configure ETS to define traffic classes based on priority Assign a weighted guaranteed bandwidth for non strict priority SP traffic SP traffic always has first priority First define traffic classes This is an example where the non editable default traffic class ID O uses SP queuing LAN and SAN traffic uses WFQ queuing with equal weighting of 50 each Table 2 Defined Traffic Classes TRAFFIC CLASS ID GUARANTEED BANDWIDTH CLASS NAME 0 SP Default 1 50 SAN 2 50 LAN Next define relative weights for non SP traffic In the example the guaranteed minimum bandwidth for both SAN and LAN traffic is 2 5Gbp with a physical link bandwidth of 10Gbps Table 3 Defined Relative Weights NAME INCOMING TRAFFIC GUARANTEED MINIMUM OUTGOING TRAFFIC BANDWIDTH GBPS BANDWIDTH BANDWIDTH GBPS Default 5 5 SP 5 SAN 3 10 5 50 50 50 2 5 2 5 LAN 4 10 5 50 50 50 2 5 2 5 Next configure port 1 and bind priorities as follows XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 0 1 and 2 to traffic class 2 LAN e 3 4 5 and 6 to ID 1 SAN 7 to O the default traffic class If there is network congestion
149. DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable DiffServ on the Switch Port This field displays the index number of a port on the Switch Active Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Select Active to enable DiffServ on the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 33 3 1 Configuring 2 Rate 3 Color Marker Settings Use this screen to configure TRTCM settings Click the 2 rate 3 Color Marker link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 33 Differentiated Services Note You cannot enable both TRTCM and Bandwidth Control at the same time Diffserv red Figure 151 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker ESET a Mare Active O ce x Mode color blind C color aware Port Active Commit Rate MEE green yellow E 1 2 o gt DLE OB FEE EE DIS TH A Kbp
150. Discard source to drop frames from the source MAC address specified in the MAC field The Switch can still send frames to the MAC address Select Discard destination to drop frames to the destination MAC address specified in the MAC address The Switch can still receive frames originating from the MAC address Select Discard source and Discard destination to block traffic to from the MAC address specified in the MAC field XS3900 48F User s Guide 105 Chapter 10 Filtering Table 30 Advanced Application gt Filtering continued LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Type a MAC address in a valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs VID Type the VLAN group identification number Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to change the settings Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purposes only MAC This field displays
151. EL DESCRIPTION Throttling IGMP throttling controls how the Switch deals with the IGMP reports when the maximum number of the IGMP groups a port can join is reached Select Deny to drop any new IGMP join report received on this port until an existing multicast forwarding table entry is aged out Select Replace to replace an existing entry in the multicast forwarding table with the new IGMP report s received on this port IGMP Filtering Select the name of the IGMP filtering profile to use for this port Otherwise select Profile Default to prohibit the port from joining any multicast group You can create IGMP filtering profiles in the Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt I GMP Filtering Profile screen IGMP Querier The Switch treats an IGMP query port as being connected to an IGMP multicast router or Mode server The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP query port Select Auto to have the Switch use the port as an IGMP query port if the port receives IGMP query packets Select Fixed to have the Switch always use the port as an IGMP query port Select this when you connect an IGMP multicast server to the port Select Edge to stop the Switch from using the port as an IGMP query port The Switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port The Switch does not forward IGMP join or leave packets to this port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory
152. Example A VLAN 1 Multicast VLAN S m mmm e RN 1 VLAN 2 gt M takai TT ag 1 VLAN 3 E 22 6 1 Types of MVR Ports In MVR a source port is a port on the Switch that can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN while a receiver port can only receive multicast traffic Once configured the Switch maintains a forwarding table that matches the multicast stream to the associated multicast group 22 6 2 MVR Modes You can set your Switch to operate in either dynamic or compatible mode In dynamic mode the Switch sends IGMP leave and join reports to the other multicast devices such as multicast routers or servers in the multicast VLAN This allows the multicast devices to update the multicast forwarding table to forward or not forward multicast traffic to the receiver ports In compatible mode the Switch does not send any IGMP reports In this case you must manually configure the forwarding settings on the multicast devices in the multicast VLAN 22 6 3 How MVR Works The following figure shows a multicast television example where a subscriber device such as a computer in VLAN 1 receives multicast traffic from the streaming media server S via the Switch Multiple subscriber devices can connect through a port configured as the receiver on the Switch When the subscriber selects a television channel computer A sends an IGMP report to the Switch to join the appropriate multicast group If the IGMP report matches one
153. IS OI IU aia 15 CACTI E KioN YOU OVER aa a 17 IU CMT LT 25 Switch Hardware Overview cccccccccccccececcsessesseaaeeecceseeecceseeseuasesecseeeeeeseseeseeeaseasececeeeeeeceeesesaaaeseeeeaeens 49 Buses eligi ET T PP REA 53 Technical RelereNCE smsriscioniic aiii iia liaicliiciisiid dina ill 63 SISI cats and Port GCS Het 65 Basie SUI A A A 70 iv o O eo 81 SIC NMAC PAI SONO ida 99 end e ee S E i a NNMERO ONCE 101 EM E m o OUT 105 erra Dres PEDIDOS eed ope prb bd rte ba enn ROPA E RTI a ribs far rrr 107 BST CORO duiusauce tue ke ndtiasu Nx cae cd RE CR RR ssa n Das E cox Rs Fe ada UE Gd v DR an ac xu E a MOERS 125 e o eri qe REOR a DL UH HN 128 ps qs MORET T ume 130 Lib ORIS RON aaa 132 Polo mU i scientie est oto E ce act OL do Roues tune regine use open Ra rapi ou ia Etc cu ledere aris 140 A TD D D E 148 LIBERIIIGI rai 151 POTES A ERA 157 A A O 162 VLAN ccc ro eceied catiedn aes topcase atine dy culate a ane eek 165 BASINS E P A M 172 T UL re Mt 187 A E E OE RE 200 ESSE DIU AE sara par cassia aos a ds 220 CLON Ul ell I ETT 224 Lave 2 Sl TOI A A a risas dead 228 lx S M NN NR S TT iio 232 dua cet 236 Enor DIS Tc 244 Prvale YLAN Tm 249 R E Pr ET 253 Differentiated Services a la aaia 256 gd t 263 MSI INES
154. IUS server when performing authentication 23 3 1 1 Attributes Used for Authenticating Privilege Access User Name the format of the User Name attribute is enab where is the privilege level 1 14 User Password NAS Identifier NAS IP Address 23 3 1 2 Attributes Used to Login Users User Name User Password NAS Identifier NAS 1P Address 23 3 1 3 Attributes Used by the IEEE 802 1x Authentication User Name NAS Identifier NAS IP Address NAS Port NAS Port Type This value is set to Ethernet 15 on the Switch Calling Station Id Frame MTU EAP Message State Message Authenticator 23 3 2 Attributes Used for Accounting The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing authentication XS3900 48F User s Guide 197 Chapter 23 AAA 23 3 2 1 Attributes Used for Accounting System Events NAS IP Address NAS Identifier Acct Status Type Acct Session ID The format of Acct Session Id is date time 8 digit sequential number for example 2007041917210300000001 date 2007 04 19 time 17 21 03 serial number 00000001 Acct Delay Time 23 3 2 2 Attributes Used for Accounting Exec Events The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time that they are sent the difference between Console and Telnet SSH Exec events is that the Telnet SSH events utilize the Calling Station Id attribute Table 79 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console
155. LAN groups with each group containing up to 4 094 customer VLANs This allows a service provider to provide different service based on specific VLANs for many different customers A service provider s customers may require a range of VLANs to handle multiple applications A service provider s customers can assign their own inner VLAN tags on ports for these applications The service provider can assign an outer VLAN tag for each customer Therefore there is no VLAN tag overlap among customers so traffic from different customers is kept separate 21 1 1 VLAN Stacking Example In the following example figure both A and B are Service Provider s Network SPN customers with VPN tunnels between their head offices and branch offices respectively Both have an identical VLAN tag for their VLAN group The service provider can separate these two VLANs within its network by XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking adding tag 37 to distinguish customer A and tag 48 to distinguish customer B at edge device 1 and then stripping those tags at edge device 2 as the data frames leave the network Figure 85 VLAN Stacking Example A A VLAN 24 VLAN 24 SPN 8 z A 37 24 gt B 48 24 N aces Mars VLAN 24 VLAN 24 B B 21 2 VLAN Stacking Port Roles Each port can have three VLAN stacking roles Normal Access Port and Tunnel Port the latter is for Gigabit ports only Select Normal for regular non VLAN stacking IEEE 8
156. MP gt User continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Select an authentication algorithm MD5 Message Digest 5 and SHA Secure Hash Algorithm are hash algorithms used to authenticate SNMP data SHA authentication is generally considered stronger than MD5 but is slower Password Enter the password of up to 32 ASCII characters for SNMP user authentication Privacy Specify the encryption method for SNMP communication from this user You can choose one of the following e DES Data Encryption Standard is a widely used but breakable method of data encryption It applies a 56 bit key to each 64 bit block of data AES Advanced Encryption Standard is another method for data encryption that also uses a secret key AES applies a 128 bit key to 128 bit blocks of data Password Enter the password of up to 32 ASCII characters for encrypting SNMP packets Group SNMP v3 adopts the concept of View based Access Control Model VACM group SNMP managers in one group are assigned common access rights to MIBs Specify in which SNMP group this user is admin Members of this group can perform all types of system configuration including the management of administrator accounts readwrite Members of this group have read and write rights meaning that the user can create and edit the MIBs on the Switch except the user account and AAA configuration readonly Members of this group have read rights only
157. MT This means that device s connected to the other port s do not receive these frames Select I n Band to have the Switch send the frames to all ports except the management port labelled MGMT to which connected device s do not receive these frames In band Management IP Address Use these fields to set the settings for the in band management port DHCP Select this to have the in band management port receive an IP address from an external Client DHCP server Static IP Select this to give the in band management port a fixed IP address subnet mask and Address default gateway 76 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 6 Basic Setting Table 16 Basic Setting gt IP Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address Enter the in band management port IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation For example 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Enter the in band management port IP subnet mask of your Switch in dotted decimal Mask notation for example 255 255 255 0 Default Enter the in band management port IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted Gateway decimal notation for example 192 168 1 254 VID Enter the VLAN identification number to which the in band management port belongs Out of band Management IP Address use these fields to set the settings for the out of band management port IP Address Enter the out of band management
158. N A N A Trusted B Port 11 to A 1 N A N A Trusted Port 12 to S 1 N A N A Trusted XS3900 48F User s Guide EN Chapter 2 Tutorials 2 3 1 Configuring Switch A 1 Click Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent Select Active then click Apply L_6 Intermediate Agent Port VLAN access node identifier circuit id Active identifier string option spy v delimiter v Apply Cancel PPPoE Click Port on the top of the screen Select Untrusted for port 5 and enter userC as Circuit id and 00134900000A as Remote id Select Trusted for port 12 and then leave the other fields empty Click Apply 6 Untrusted 7 Untrusted v 8 Untrusted v 9 Untrusted i 10 Untusted v 11 Untrusted 12 Trusted v 13 Untrusted 14 1 aa ted BB TUUM VLAN AInG Port Server Trusted State Circuit id Untrusted Y 1 Untrusted v Ed 2 Untrusted Y 3 Untrusted v 4 Untrusted v Intermediate Agent Remote id 5 Untrusted v luserC 001349000004 Then Click Intermediate Agent on the top of the screen XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 3 The Intermediate Agent screen appears Click VLAN on the top of the screen 1 Intermediate Agent Port Active v access node identifier XS3900 circuit id Active O identifier string option spy Y delimiter v PPPoE
159. Name Enter a descriptive name for this rule for identifying purposes Packet Specify the format of the packet Choices are All 802 3 tagged 802 3 untagged Ethernet II Format tagged and Ethernet Il untagged A value of 802 3 indicates that the packets are formatted according to the IEEE 802 3 standards A value of Ethernet II indicates that the packets are formatted according to RFC 894 Ethernet Il encapsulation Layer 2 Specify the fields below to configure a layer 2 classifier XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 18 Classifier Table 54 Advanced Application gt Classifier continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Select Any to classify traffic from any VLAN or select the second option and specify the source VLAN ID in the field provided Priority Select Any to classify traffic from any priority level or select the second option and specify a priority level in the field provided Ethernet Select an Ethernet type or select Other and enter the Ethernet type number in hexadecimal Type value Refer to Table 56 on page 154 for information Source MAC Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses Address To specify a source select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs Port Type the port number to which the rule should be applied You may choose one port only or all ports Any Destination MAC Select Any to apply the
160. P 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP_TUNNEL GRE User Defined 47 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 XS3900 48F User s Guide Appendix A Common Services Table 152 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send
161. Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 11 1 on page 107 for more information on MRSTP XS3900 48F User s Guide 117 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Note This screen is only available after you activate MRSTP on the Switch Figure 57 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP panning a TE Tree Protoc ly Bridge Tree Bridge ID Max Age second Cost to Bridge Port ID Topology Changed Ti Time Since Last Cha ree Frotoco Hello Time second Forwarding Delay second tatus Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP ol MRSTP Root Our Bridge 8000 001349000002 8000 001349000002 2 2 20 20 15 15 0 0x0000 mes 0 nge 0 00 00 The following table Table 37 Advanced describes the labels in this screen Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click MRSTP to edit MRSTP settings on the Switch Max Age second Tree Select which STP tree configuration you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the
162. SNMP manager Choose SNMP version 2c v2c SNMP version 3 v3 or both v3v2c Note SNMP version 2c is backwards compatible with SNMP version 1 Enter the Get Community string which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station The Get Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Set Community Enter the Set Community string which is the password for the incoming Set requests from the management station The Set Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Trap Community Enter the Trap Community string which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager The Trap Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Trap Destination Use this section to configure where to send SNMP traps from the Switch Version Specify the version of the SNMP trap messages IP Enter the IP addresses of up to four managers to send your SNMP traps to Port Enter the port number upon which the manager listens for SNMP traps XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control Table 135 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Username Enter the username to be sent to the SNMP manager along with the SNMP v3 trap Note This username must match an existing account on the Switch configured in the Manage
163. Storm Control OLE ESE J Active O Port Broadcast pkt s Multicast pkt s DLF pkt s O O O 1 O 0 O 0 O 0 2 O lo O 0 O 0 3 E j0 O 0 O 0 4 O 0 O 0 O 0 Apply Cancel g 0 8 O 10 O l0 O 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable traffic storm control on the Switch Clear this check box to disable this feature Port This field displays a port number XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm Control Table 42 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Broadcast pkt s Select this option and specify how many broadcast packets the port receives per second The allowed range is 0 to 33554431 Multicast pkt s Select this option and specify how many multicast packets the port receives per second The allowed range is 0 to 33554431 DLF pkt s Select this option and specify how many destination lookup failure DLF packets the port receives per second The allowed r
164. Switch learns the bindings by snooping DHCP packets dynamic bindings and from information provided manually by administrators static bindings To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard Figure 108 P Source Guard 8 IP Source Guard____ Static Binding DHCP Snooping Arp Inspection Index Mac Address IP Address Lease Type VID Port 1 a1 12 12 12 12 01 172 23 37 222 inifinity static 1 18 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 83 P Source Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding Lease This field displays how many days hours minutes and seconds the binding is valid for example 2d3h4m5s means the binding is still valid for 2 days 3 hours 4 minutes and 5 seconds This field displays infinity if the binding is always valid for example a static binding XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Table 83 IP Source Guard continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator dhcp snooping This binding was learned by snooping DHCP packets VID This field displays the source VL
165. The figure below shows the front panel of the Switch Figure 9 Front Panel The following table describes the ports Table 7 Panel Connections QSFP Ports CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION 48 10GbE Use Small Form Factor Pluggable Plus SFP transceivers in these ports for fiber optic or SFP Ports copper connections to a server Ethernet switch or router You can also insert an SFP Direct Attach Copper DAC in the SFP slot Four 40GbE Use Quad Small Form Factor Pluggable Plus QSFP transceivers in these ports for fiber optic or copper connections to a server Ethernet switch or router Console Port RJ 45 out of band management port Connect this port to your computer using a USB cable if you want to configure the Switch using the command line interface CLI via the console port You don t need to install a USB driver to use this port Connect an Ethernet cable to this port for dedicated management of the Switch You can configure the Switch via Telnet or the web configurator The default IP address of the management port is 192 168 0 1 with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 This port can operate at 10 100 1000 Mbps speeds and is not VLAN aware 3 1 1 Q SFP Transceiver Slots These are 48 slots for Small Form Factor Pluggable Plus SFP transceivers and four for Quad Small Form Factor Pluggable Plus QSFP transceivers A transceiver is a single unit that houses a transmitt
166. This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Configuration Name This field displays the configuration name for this MST region Revision Number This field displays the revision number for this MST region Configuration Digest A configuration digest is generated from the VLAN MSTI mapping information This field displays the 16 octet signature that is included in an MSTP BPDU This field displays the digest when MSTP is activated on the system Topology Changed Times This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured Instance These fields display the MSTI to VLAN mapping In other words which VLANs run on each spanning tree instance Instance This field displays the MSTI ID VLAN This field displays which VLANs are mapped to an MSTI MSTI Select the MST instance settings you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the MST instance Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Internal Cost Port ID This is the path cost from the root port in this MST instance to the regional
167. To open this screen click Advanced Application gt P Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure Figure 111 DHCP Snooping Configure DHCP Snooping Configure Port VLAN DHCP Snooping Active a Br Disable C an r pm Database Agent URL Timeout interval 300 seconds Write delay interval 300 seconds Renew DHCP Snooping URL Renew Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 86 DHCP Snooping Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch You still have to enable DHCP snooping on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports Note The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports DHCP Vlan Select a VLAN ID if you want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to DHCP servers on a specific VLAN Note You have to enable DHCP snooping on the DHCP VLAN too You can enable Option82 in the DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure screen Section 24 5 2 on page 212 to help the DHCP servers distinguish between DHCP requests from different VLAN Select Disable if you do not want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to a specific VLAN Database If Timeout interval is greater than Write delay interval it is possible that the next update is scheduled to occur before the current update has finished successfully or timed out In this case the Switch waits to start the next update until it completes t
168. User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 6 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently 7 The DHCP server can then assign a specific IP address based on the DHCP request 2 2 4 Troubleshooting Check the client A s IP address If it did not receive the IP address 172 16 1 18 make sure 1 Client A is connected to the Switch s port 2 in VLAN 102 2 You configured the correct VLAN ID port number and system name for DHCP relay on both the DHCP server and the Switch 3 You clicked the Save link on the Switch to have your settings take effect 2 3 How to Use PPPoE IA on the Switch You want to configure PPPoE Intermediate Agent on the Switch A to pass a subscriber s information to a PPPoE server S There is another switch B between switch A and server S Switch B is connected to switch A In this way PPPoE server S can identify subscriber C and may apply different settings to it Figure 6 Tutorial PPPoE Intermediate Agentt Tutorial Overview B cs E S m che 12 Trusted N b Port 11 Trusted C BH Port 12 Trusted SE Port 5 Untrusted Note For related information about PPPoE IA see Section 29 3 on page 238 The settings in this tutorial are as follows Table6 Settings in this Tutorial SWITCH CONNECTED VLAN CIRCUIT ID REMOTE ID PPPOE IA PORT TRUSTED A Port 5 to C 1 userC 00134900000A Untrusted Port 12 to B 1
169. VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Enabled Select Yes to enable ARP inspection on the VLAN Select No to disable ARP inspection on the VLAN Log Specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from the VLAN None The Switch does not generate any log messages when it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Deny The Switch generates log messages when it discards an ARP packet from the VLAN Permit The Switch generates log messages when it forwards an ARP packet from the VLAN All The Switch generates log messages every time it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values XS3900 48F User s Guide Loop Guard This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to guard against loops on the edge of your network 25 1 Loop Guard Overview Loop guard allows you to configure the Switch to shut down a port if it detects that packets sent out on that port loop back to the Switch While you can use Spanning Tree Protocol STP to prevent loops in the core of your network STP cannot prevent loops that occur on t
170. XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2 2 1 DHCP Relay Tutorial Introduction In this example you have configured your DHCP server 192 168 2 3 and want to have it assign a specific IP address say 172 16 1 18 and gateway information to DHCP client A based on the system name VLAN ID and port number in the DHCP request Client A connects to the Switch s port 2 in VLAN 102 Figure 5 Tutorial DHCP Relay Scenario b ZS DHCP Server 192 168 2 3 Port 2 PVID 102 172 16 1 18 2 2 2 Creating a VLAN Follow the steps below to configure port 2 as a member of VLAN 102 1 Access the web configurator through the Switch s management port XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2 Go to Basic Setting gt Switch Setup and set the VLAN type to 802 1Q Click Apply to save the settings to the run time memory a EGE oD VLAN Type Bridge Control Protocol Transparency Active F Smart Isolation Active O MAC Address Learning Aging Time 300 seconds Join Timer 200 milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer 110000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment Level7 17 Level6 6 ivl Level5 I5iv Level4 4 v Level3 3 v Level2 13v Level1 o v Level 2 x Click Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN In the Static VLAN screen select ACTIVE enter a descriptive name VLAN 102 for example in the Name field and enter 102
171. ZyXEL XS3900 48F 48 port 10GbE Top of Rack Switch with 4 port 40GbE Uplink Version 4 00 Edition 2 4 2013 Default Login Details IP Address http 192 168 0 1 Out of band MGMT port http 192 168 1 1 In band ports User Name admin Password 1234 Copyright 2013 ZyXEL Communications Corporation IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE Screenshots and graphics in this book may differ slightly from your product due to differences in your product firmware or your computer operating system Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate Switch title case refers to this product Lower case switch refers to switches in general Related Documentation Module Hardware Installation Guide This guide shows how to install and remove the power and fan modules in the Switch Rack Mounting Hardware Installation Guide This guide shows how to use the rack mounting kit to install the Switch in a rack CLI Reference Guide This guide explains how to use the Command Line Interface CLI to configure the Switch Note It is recommended you use the Web Configurator to configure the Switch Web Configurator Online Help Click the help icon in any screen for help in configuring that screen and supplementary information XS3900 48F User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Usero GUNO SAEI TII LT DI
172. a longer delay is required as the device that causes a topology change first notifies the root bridge and then the root bridge notifies the network Both RSTP and STP flush unwanted learned addresses from the filtering database In RSTP the port states are Discarding Learning and Forwarding Note In this user s guide STP refers to both STP and RSTP 11 1 1 STP Terminology The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port The recommended cost is assigned according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached The slower the media the higher the cost Table 31 STP Path Costs PINK SPEED MMETDED A RECOMMENDED ALLOWED RANGE Path Cost 4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 1 to 65535 Path Cost 10Mbps 100 50 to 600 1 to 65535 Path Cost 16Mbps 62 40 to 400 1 to 65535 Path Cost 100Mbps 19 10 to 60 1 to 65535 XS3900 48F User s Guide 107 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 31 STP Path Costs RECOMMENDED RECOMMENDED LINK SPEED VALUE RANGE ALLOWED RANGE Path Cost 1Gbps 4 3 to 10 1to 65535 Path Cost 10Gbps 2 1to5 1 to 65535 On each bridge the bridge communicates with the root through the root port The root port is the port on this Switch with the lowest path cost to the root the root path cost If there is no root port then this Switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network
173. a web configurator at any one time An administrator is someone who can both view and configure Switch changes The username for the Administrator is always admin The default administrator password is 1234 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control Note It is highly recommended that you change the default administrator password 1234 A non administrator username is something other than admin is someone who can view but not configure Switch settings Click Management Access Control Logins to view the screen as shown Figure 171 Management gt Access Control gt Logins Logins Access Control Administrator Old Password New Pass Retype to confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Edit Logins Login User Name Password Retype to confirm 1 E 3 4 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 138 Management gt Access Control gt Logins LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator This is the default administrator account with the admin user name You cannot change the default administrator user name Only the administrator has read write access Old Password Type the existing system password 1234 is the default password when shipped New Password Enter your new system password Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for
174. aa 36 2 4 How to Use Error Disable and Recovery on the Switch eessssssssseeeeeereennnt 38 En CEN A LAB Paneer torent sorrrt er oar A OU EcL Rand KLAR USE EX QU 40 20 Gating POG lh 41 ET Plow to Set Upa Gest PLAN arrainean tanta pa peo edd td 42 NS Ee cup EI CUIM d eet CE 42 2 7 2 Enabling IEEE 802 1 Port Authentication uius retenir crt ii 45 2 2 IY COES YLAN sra oral a ade 46 XS3900 48F User s Guide EN Table of Contents Chapter 3 o AAA 49 3 1 Front Panel Connections ua da 49 SA OVOP PS Manacor IONS as 49 or SAMA aia aia 51 da Powell ONE ri Oc ddixte ox de ur E codd iueP OU ede RUP CHE ROVS E 51 To WI LEDS MT 52 Chapter 4 TE WEN II iia 53 A do Ob cx E N E Las SYL S Eu Ue C MOX SURE e b bad fo 53 S2 SiS LOA uenis eaten edo gel tet che ide Ss cabins P RIP aa Hire E 53 23 The Web Conus LSyVelil uuuucaeduivenosteatonuund tend airada 54 2 NBS VOUT PASCO em 58 AA A 59 25 SWNSI A sia kaadurgiied mwas d Dd Rd RR Fa RAE 59 HPLC uper fers MEM m 59 Z6 Reload he Ganliggretlon PS 3 5 xad n A t a attigi a x Fed c aa 59 42 Logging Out ofthe Web Coniguralar esa n e A 61 E E EE 61 Part il Technical FRR S 63 Chapter 5 System Sus and Pori SSCS 65 HRE CIS D E E Po E E EES E A E E E P wl 65 Be PORES SUMMA t ET 65 BI SUS POR 25 01 M ERE 66 Chapter 6 A Y A
175. able see Section 10 1 on page 105 The MAC address es will be removed from the MAC table and all traffic sent from the MAC address es will be blocked by the Switch Click this to search data in the MAC table according to your input criteria XS3900 48F User s Guide 307 Chapter 40 MAC Table Table 149 Management gt MAC Table continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Transfer Click this to perform the MAC address transferring you selected in the Transfer Type field Cancel Click this to begin configuring the search criteria afresh The Total Number of MAC Address This field displays the total number of MAC addresses learned on the Switch Change Pages Index This is the incoming frame index number MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came VID This is the VLAN group to which this frame belongs Port This is the port from which the above MAC address was learned Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen Click Previous or Next to show the previous next screen if all status information cannot be seen in one screen XS3900 48F User s Guide ARP Table This chapter introduces ARP Table 41 1 ARP Table Overview Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical m
176. able8 Switch LEDs LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION SYS Green Blinking The Switch is rebooting and performing self diagnostic tests On The Switch is on and functioning properly Amber On The Switch is overheating due to abnormal voltage or fan speed Off The power is off or the Switch is not ready or malfunctioning MGMT LINK Green On The MGMT port is connected at 1000 Mbps Amber On The MGMT port is connected at 10 or 100 Mbps Off The MGMT port is not up or not connected to an Ethernet device ACTIVITY Green Blinking The Switch is transmitting or receiving to from an Ethernet device through the MGMT port Off The Switch is not transmitting or receiving to from an Ethernet device through the MGMT port 1 48 Green Blinking The port is receiving or transmitting data at 1 or 10 Gbps On The port has a successful 1 or 10 Gbps connection Off This link is disconnected 49 52 Green Blinking The port is receiving or transmitting data at 40 Gbps On The port has a successful 40 Gbps connection Off This link is disconnected XS3900 48F User s Guide The Web Configurator This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator 4 1 Introduction The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy Switch setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later or Firefox 2 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolut
177. achine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network An IP version 4 address is 32 bits long In an Ethernet LAN MAC addresses are 48 bits long The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address 41 1 1 How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the Switch the Switch s ARP program looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address it sends it to the device If no entry is found for the IP address ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN The Switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field In addition the Switch puts all ones in the target MAC field FF FF FF FF FF FF is the Ethernet broadcast address The replying device which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way replaces the broadcast address with the target s MAC address swaps the sender and target pairs and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 41 ARP Table 41 2 The ARP Table Screen Click Management gt ARP Table in the navigation panel to open the following screen Use the ARP table to view P to MAC addr
178. ackets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going 19 1 2 DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping DSCP 6 bits Unused 2 bits The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies 19 2 Configuring Policy Rules You must first configure a classifier in the Classifier screen Refer to Section 18 2 on page 151 for more information XS3900 48F User s Guide 157 Chapter 1
179. agnostic LO Diagnostic d Resolving 192 168 1 23 192 168 1 23 H Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Ping Host Successful System Log Display Clear IP Ping IP Address Ping Ethernet Port Test Port 1 Part Test The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 141 Management gt Diagnostic LABEL DESCRIPTION System Log Click Display to display a log of events in the multi line text box Click Clear to empty the text box and reset the syslog entry IP Ping Type the IP address of a device that you want to ping in order to test a connection Click Ping to have the Switch ping the IP address in the field to the left Ethernet Port Test Enter a port number and click Port Test to perform an internal loopback test XS3900 48F User s Guide 206 This chapter explains the syslog screens 38 1 Syslog Overview Syslog The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages A syslog enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server Syslog is defined in RFC 3164 The RFC defines the packet format content and system log related information of syslog messages Each syslog message has a facility and severity level The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog progr
180. am for details The following table describes the syslog severity levels Table 142 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY Emergency The system is unusable Alert Action must be taken immediately Critical The system condition is critical Error There is an error condition on the system Warning There is a warning condition on the system Notice There is a normal but significant condition on the system Informational The syslog contains an informational message SN Oj Ol Af W N rR O Debug The message is intended for debug level purposes XS3900 48F User s Guide 297 Chapter 38 Syslog 38 2 Syslog Setup Click Management gt Syslog in the navigation panel to display this screen The syslog feature sends logs to an external syslog server Use this screen to configure the device s system logging settings Figure 184 Management gt Syslog Syslog Setup Syslog Server Setup Syslog Active Logging type Active Facility System IV local use 0 y Interface Vv local use 0 Switch Vv local use 0 y ARA Vv local use 0 y IP Vv localuse 0 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 143 Management gt Syslog LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog Select Active to turn on syslog system logging and then configure the syslog setting Logging Type This column displays the names of the categories of logs t
181. an access port XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 27 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling 27 2 Configuring Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Click Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 130 Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling C Layer 2 Protocol Tunne Active Destination MAC Address DO foo DO oo foo foo Point to Point PAGP LACP UDLD r1 1 rH Access Access Y Port eo o az 7 v Mode Access Access Access Access Access y Access Access X0 109 2S oo Oh O ND 1 Access Access e THER Access mnininininnnunnunnmuls a Hu Ha HaHaHa HaHa HaHaHa HaHa LIELCEBEGIFEEEERDBEEBCETEBSEDETI p a 0 o 0 o O 0 0 0 0 01 CECENE CREO ERD OCRE EEA mka Hoga bes Bl m E Easel Access a M cess Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 98 Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable layer 2 protocol tunneling on the Switch Destination Specify an MAC address with which the Switch uses to encapsulate the layer 2 protocol MAC Address packets by replacing the destination MAC address in the packets Note The MAC address can be either a unicast MAC address or multicast MAC address If you use a unicast MAC address make sure the MAC address
182. and Movie are configured for the multicast VLAN 200 Figure 99 MVR Group Configuration Example Group Configuration lt pra Multicast VLAN ID 200 Name Movie Start Address 230 1 2 50 End Address 230 1 2 60 Ada Cancel MVLAN Name 200 Start Address End Address Delete All C 224 1 4 50 O Delete Group News 224 1 4 10 Delete Cancel Figure 100 MVR Group Configuration Example Group Configuration 200 WR Multicast YLAN ID Name Start Address End Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel MYLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group Movie 230 1 2 50 224 1 4 10 230 1 2 60 O 224 1 4 50 Delete Cancel XS3900 48F User s Guide AAA This chapter describes how to configure authentication authorization and accounting settings on the Switch 23 1 Authentication Authorization and Accounting AAA Authentication is the process of determining who a user is and validating access to the Switch The Switch can authenticate users who try to log in based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself The Switch can also use an external authentication server to authenticate a large number of users Authorization is the process of determining what a user is allowed to do Different user accounts may have higher or lower privilege levels associated with them For example user A may have the right to create n
183. and forward a tagged BPDU Media Type On any 10 Gigabit interface such as the SFP slot you can insert either an SFP transceiver or an SFP Direct Attach Copper DAC An SFP Direct Attach Copper DAC is an SFP housing that has no optical module but uses a fixed length passive copper cable assembly which reduces cost and power significantly Select the media type sfp plus or dac10g of the SFP module that is attached to the 10 Gigabit interface XS3900 48F User s Guide 79 Chapter 6 Basic Setting Table 18 Basic Setting gt Port Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh EN XS3900 48F User s Guide T VLAN The type of screen you see here depends on the VLAN Type you selected in the Switch Setup screen This chapter shows you how to configure 802 1Q tagged and port based VLANs 7 1 Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLANs A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the switch on which they were created The VLANs can be created statically by hand or d
184. and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a Switch Examples of variables include number of packets received node port status and so on A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Table 129 SNMP Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events 36 3 1 SNMP v3 and Security SNMP v3 enhances security for SNMP management SNMP managers can be required to authenticate with agents before conducting SNMP management sessions Security can be further enhanced by encrypting the SNMP messages sent from the managers Encryption protects the contents of the SNMP messages When t
185. and okay 150 Opening data connection for LIST W W w l owner group 3042210 Jul 01 12 00 ras rw rw rw 1 owner group 393216 Jul 01 12 00 config W W w l owner group 0 Jul 01 12 00 fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 rw rw rw l owner group 0 Jul 01 12 00 config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 226 File sent OK ftp 297 bytes received in 0 00Seconds 297000 00Kbytes sec ftp bin 200 Type I OK ftp put 400AAEWOCO bin fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 226 File received OK ftp 262144 bytes sent in 0 63Seconds 415 44Kbytes sec ftp XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 39 Cluster Management The following table explains some of the FTP parameters Table 147 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example FTP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION User Enter admin Password The web configurator password default is 1234 ls Enter this command to list the name of cluster member switch s firmware and configuration file 400AAEWOCO bin This is the name of the firmware file you want to upload to the cluster member switch fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s firmware name as seen in the cluster manager switch config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s configuration file name as seen in the cluster manager switch 39 3 Clustering Management Configuration Use this scre
186. ange is 0 to 33554431 Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide Mirroring This chapter discusses port mirroring setup screens 14 1 Port Mirroring Setup Port mirroring allows you to copy a traffic flow to a monitor port the port you copy the traffic to in order that you can examine the traffic from the monitor port without interference Click Advanced Application gt Mirroring in the navigation panel to display the Mirroring screen Use this screen to select a monitor port and specify the traffic flow to be copied to the monitor port Figure 63 Advanced Application gt Mirroring A OLD Active 1 Monitor Port 1 Port Mirrored Direction f Ingress Ingress Ingress Ingress Ingress Ingress Ingress dH Ingress y ro Toon IPIS aSa Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 43 Advanced Application gt Mirroring LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate port mirroring on the Switch Clear this check box to disable the feature Monitor The monitor port is the port you copy the traffic
187. ansfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer or HTTP over SSL is a web protocol that encrypts and decrypts web pages Secure Socket Layer SSL is an application level protocol that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality an unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data authentication one party can identify the other party and data integrity you know if data has been changed It relies upon certificates public keys and private keys HTTPS on the Switch is used so that you may securely access the Switch using the web configurator The SSL protocol specifies that the SSL server the Switch must always authenticate itself to the SSL client the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the Switch whereas the SSL client only should authenticate itself when the SSL server requires it to do so Authenticating client certificates is optional and if selected means the SSL client must send the Switch a certificate You must apply for a certificate for the browser from a Certificate Authority CA that is a trusted CA on the Switch Please refer to the following figure 1 HTTPS connection requests from an SSL aware web browser go to port 443 by default on the Switch s WS web server 288 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control 2 HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 by default on the Switch s WS web server Figure 174 HTTPS Implementation WS HTTPS HTTP
188. ard Setup Table 29 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port s within a identified VLAN group to which frames containing the specified multicast MAC address will be forwarded Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 104 XS3900 48F User s Guide Filtering This chapter discusses MAC address port filtering 10 1 Configure a Filtering Rule Configure the Switch to filter traffic based on the traffic s source destination MAC addresses and or VLAN group ID Click Advanced Application gt Filtering in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 46 Advanced Application gt Filtering LE Filtering Active E Name Discard source Action Discard destination aa t m m VID Ada Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Action Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 30 Advanced Application gt Filtering LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Make sure to select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by deselecting this check box Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for this rule This is for identification only Action Select
189. arded to the RADIUS server Password Type the password the Switch sends along with the MAC address of a client for authentication with the RADIUS server You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII characters Timeout Specify the amount of time before the Switch allows a client MAC address that fails authentication to try and authenticate again Maximum time is 3000 seconds When a client fails MAC authentication its MAC address is learned by the MAC address table with a status of denied The timeout period you specify here is the time the MAC address entry stays in the MAC address table until it is cleared If you specify O for the timeout value then this entry will not be deleted from the MAC address table Note If the Aging Time in the Switch Setup screen is set to a lower value then it supersedes this setting See Section 6 5 on page 74 Port This field displays a port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to permit MAC authentication on this port You must first allow MAC authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your cha
190. ation protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Enable this function to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch Please refer to the following table for common IEEE 802 1Q VLAN terminology Table 19 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Terminology VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Permanent VLAN This is a static VLAN created manually Dynamic VLAN This is a VLAN configured by a GVRP registration deregistration process VLAN Administrative Registration Fixed Fixed registration ports are permanent VLAN members Control Registration Ports with registration forbidden are forbidden to join the Forbidden specified VLAN Normal Registration Ports dynamically join a VLAN using GVRP VLAN Tag Control Tagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing frames transmitted Untagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN don t tag all outgoing frames transmitted received Acceptable Frame You may choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming Type frames just tagged incoming frames or just untagged incoming frames on a port Ingress filtering If set the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not have this port as a member EB XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 7 VLAN 7 3 Port VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through that port This is useful if you
191. atus in all web configurator screens to display the Status screen as shown next Figure 20 Port Status Port Status Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors TxKB s RxKB s Up Time 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 6 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 9 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 11 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 12 100M F FORWARDING Disabled 29023 60633 8 32 29 206 __ 0 46 28 3 STOP isa 0 0 9 Any Por The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 Port Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This identifies the Ethernet port Click a port number to display the Port Details screen refer to Figure 21 on page 67 Name This is the name you assigned to this port in the Basic Setting gt Port Setup screen XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 5 System Status and Port Statistics Table 11 Port Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Link This field displays the speed 1000M for 1000 Mbps 10G for 10 Gbps and 40G for 40 Gbps and the duplex F for full duplex This field displays Down if the
192. b Configurator 4 4 Saving Your Configuration When you are done modifying the settings in a screen click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off Click the Save link in the upper right hand corner of the web configurator to save your configuration to nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory refers to the Switch s storage that remains even if the Switch s power is turned off Note Use the Save link when you are done with a configuration session 4 5 Switch Lockout You could block yourself and all others from using in band management managing through the data ports if you do one of the following 1 Delete the management VLAN default is VLAN 1 2 Delete all port based VLANs with the CPU port as a member The CPU port is the management port of the Switch 3 Filter all traffic to the CPU port 4 Disable all ports 5 Misconfigure the text configuration file 6 Forget the password and or IP address 7 Prevent all services from accessing the Switch 8 Change a service port number but forget it Note Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the Switch If you do lock yourself out try using out of band management via the management port to configure the Switch 4 6 Resetting the Switch If you lock yourself and others from the Switch or forget the administrator password you will need to reload the facto
193. c T6 src dst mac M T7 src dst mac T8 src dst mac Y T9 src dst mac M T10 src dstmac M TH rc d c 86 M te A CP ees Port Group None vw None vw None m None qY 0 Nie ew Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 47 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Link This is the only screen you need to configure to enable static link aggregation Aggregation Setting Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Active Select this option to activate a trunk group XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 15 Link Aggregation Table 47 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Criteria Select the outgoing traffic distribution type Packets from the same source and or to the same destination are sent over the same link within the trunk By default the Switch uses the src dst mac distribution type If the Switch is behind a router the packet s destination or source MAC address will be changed In this case set the Switch to distribute traffic based on its IP address to make sure port trunking can work properly Select src mac to distribute traffic based on the packet s source MAC address Select dst mac to distribute traffi
194. c based on the packet s destination MAC address Select src dst mac to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination MAC addresses Select src ip to distribute traffic based on the packet s source IP address Select dst ip to distribute traffic based on the packet s destination IP address Select src dst ip to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination IP addresses Port Group This field displays the port number Select the trunk group to which a port belongs Note When you enable the port security feature on the Switch and configure port security settings for a port you cannot include the port in an active trunk group Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 15 Link Aggregation 15 5 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Click in the Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP to display the screen shown next See Section 15 2 on page 132 for more information on dynamic link aggregation Figure 66 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting
195. can still customize these settings by adding deleting incoming or outgoing ports but you must also click Apply at the bottom of the screen Incoming These are the ingress ports an ingress port is an incoming port that is a port through which a data packet enters If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the ingress port for both ports The numbers in the top row denote the incoming port for the corresponding port listed on the left its outgoing port CPU refers to the Switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port Outgoing These are the egress ports An egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the egress port for both ports CPU refers to the Switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh
196. cess Control to go back to the main Access Control screen Figure 181 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control a ervice Access Contro Access Control Services Active Service Port Timeout Telnet v fe SSH m fe2 FTP 2 p HTTP Iv ao Bo Minutes HTTPS Vv 443 ICMP iv SNMP iv App Cancel XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 139 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Services Services you may use to access the Switch are listed here Active Select this option for the corresponding services that you want to allow to access the Switch Service Port For Telnet SSH FTP HTTP or HTTPS services you may change the default service port by typing the new port number in the Server Port field If you change the default port number then you will have to let people who wish to use the service know the new port number for that service Timeout Type how many minutes a management session via the web configurator can be left idle before the session times out After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to sav
197. ch Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Table 71 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Source Port Select this option to set this port as the MVR source port that sends and receives multicast traffic All source ports must belong to a single multicast VLAN Receiver Port Select this option to set this port as a receiver port that only receives multicast traffic None Select this option to set the port not to participate in MVR No MVR multicast traffic is sent or received on this port Tagging Select this checkbox if you want the port to tag the VLAN ID in all outgoing frames transmitted Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Active This field displays whether the multicast group is
198. ch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet The Switch automatically deletes the MAC address filter afterwards Type 0 if you want the MAC address filter to be permanent Log Profile Log buffer size Enter the maximum number 1 1024 of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and have not been sent to the syslog server yet Make sure this number is appropriate for the specified Syslog rate and Log interval If the number of log messages in the Switch exceeds this number the Switch stops recording log messages and simply starts counting the number of entries that were dropped due to unavailable buffer Click Clearing log status table in the ARP Inspection Log Status screen to clear the log and reset this counter See Section 24 6 2 on page 215 Syslog rate Type the maximum number of syslog messages the Switch can send to the syslog server in one batch This number is expressed as a rate because the batch frequency is determined by the Log Interval You must configure the syslog server Chapter 38 on page 297 to use this Enter 0 if you do not want the Switch to send log messages generated by ARP packets to the syslog server The relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval is illustrated in the following examples 4invalid ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log interval is 1 the Switch sends 4 syslog messages every second 6invalid ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log interval is 2 the Switch
199. checkbox es in the table 22 8 1 MVR Configuration Example The following figure shows a network example where ports 1 2 and 3 on the Switch belong to VLAN 1 In addition port 7 belongs to the multicast group with VID 200 to receive multicast traffic the XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast News and Movie channels from the remote streaming media server S Computers A B and Cin VLAN 1 are able to receive the traffic Figure 97 MVR Configuration Example Le Po STRAE News 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 VLAN 1 X Multicast VID 200 Movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 I om CA 1A B L M LI 5 i See C To configure the MVR settings on the Switch create a multicast group in the MVR screen and set the receiver and source ports Figure 98 MVR Configuration Example D Multicast Setting Group Configuration Active Iv Name Premium Multicast VLAN ID 200 802 1p Priority 0 Mode Dynamic Compatible Port Source Port Receiver Port None Tagging 1 2 3 C 4 T 5 C C OI r 7 e e O Vv 9 e G e n 10 o c c E i EXAMPLE y e C o ee t d 24 XS3900 48F User s Guide 185 Chapter 22 Multicast To set the Switch to forward the multicast group traffic to the subscribers configure multicast group settings in the Group Configuration screen The following figure shows an example where two multicast groups News
200. checkbox to disable RSTP Note You must also activate Rapid Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable RSTP on the Switch Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 34 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new
201. cific group of hosts multicast group in a different subnetwork A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group not individual receiving devices IP addresses in the Class D range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used for IP multicasting Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes see the IANA website for more information 22 1 2 IGMP Filtering With the IGMP filtering feature you can control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services such as content information distribution based on service plans and types of subscription You can set the Switch to filter the multicast group join reports on a per port basis by configuring an IGMP filtering profile and associating the profile to a port 22 1 3 IGMP Snooping The Switch can passively snoop on IGMP packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership It checks IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures multicasting accordingly IGMP snooping allows the Switch to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them The Switch forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it has learned from GMP snooping or that you have manually configured to ports that are members of that group IGMP snooping generates no additional netw
202. communicate only with the CPU management port and the ports on which the isolation feature is not enabled This has a higher priority than private vlan settings so promiscuous ports configured in the Advanced Application gt Private VLAN screen will not be able to communicate with each other if Isolation is selected here Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 7 5 5 Subnet Based VLANs Subnet based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the source IP subnet you specify When a frame is received on a port the Switch checks if a tag is added already and the IP subnet it came from The untagged packets from the same IP subnet are then placed in the same subnet based VLAN One advantage of using subnet based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to traffic from the same IP subnet Note Subnet based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN For example an ISP Internet Service Provider may divide different types of services it provides to customers into different IP subnets Traffic for voice services is designated for IP subnet 172 16 1 0 24 video for 192 168 1 0 24
203. complete see the System I nfo screen to verify your current firmware version number XS3900 48F User s Guide 271 Chapter 35 Maintenance 35 6 Restore a Configuration File Restore a previously saved configuration from your computer to the Switch using the Restore Configuration screen Figure 164 Management gt Maintenance gt Restore Configuration a Restore Configuration d Maintenance To restore the device s configuration form a file browse to the location of the configuration file and click Restore button File Path Browse Restore Type the path and file name of the configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or click Browse to display the Choose File screen from which you can locate it After you have specified the file click Restore config is the name of the configuration file on the Switch so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed when you restore using this screen 35 7 Backup a Configuration File Backing up your Switch configurations allows you to create various snapshots of your device from which you may restore at a later date Back up your current Switch configuration to a computer using the Backup Configuration screen Figure 165 Management gt Maintenance gt Backup Configuration Backup Configuration Maintenance This page allows you to back up the device s current configuration to your workstation Now clickthe Backup button
204. d access configure the secured client setting in the Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management screen for telnet HTTP and SSH see Section 36 6 on page 294 Computers not belonging to the secured client set cannot get permission to access the Switch 43 3 Switch Configuration lost my configuration settings after restart the Switch Make sure you Save your configuration into the Switch s nonvolatile memory each time you make changes Click Save at the top right corner of the web configurator to save the configuration permanently See also Section 35 3 on page 270 for more information about how to save your configuration XS3900 48F User s Guide Common Services The following table lists some commonly used services and their associated protocols and port numbers For a comprehensive list of port numbers ICMP type code numbers and services visit the IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority web site Name This is a short descriptive name for the service You can use this one or create a different one if you like Protocol This is the type of IP protocol used by the service If this is TCP UDP then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP If this is User Defined the Port s is the IP protocol number not the port number Port s This value depends on the Protocol Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers f the Protocol is TCP UDP or TCP UDP
205. d displays the role of this Switch within the cluster Manager Member you see this if you access this screen in the cluster member switch directly and not via the cluster manager None neither a manager nor a member of a cluster Manager This field displays the cluster manager switch s hardware MAC address The Number of This field displays the number of switches that make up this cluster The following fields Member describe the cluster member switches Index You can manage cluster member switches via the cluster manager switch Each number in the Index column is a hyperlink leading to the cluster member switch s web configurator see Figure 188 on page 303 MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This field displays the model name Status This field displays Online the cluster member switch is accessible Error for example the cluster member switch password was changed or the switch was set as the manager and so left the member list etc Offline the switch is disconnected Offline shows approximately 1 5 minutes after the link between cluster member and manager goes down 39 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management Go to the Clustering Management Status screen of the cluster manager switch and then select an Index hyperlink from the list of members to go to that cluster member switch s web XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 39
206. d i2 are PPPoE intermediate agent sub options which contain additional information about the PPPoE client 29 1 2 Sub Option Format There are two types of sub option Agent Circuit ID Sub option and Agent Remote ID Sub option They have the following formats Table 102 PPPoE IA Circuit ID Sub option Format User defined String SubOpt Length Value XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 29 PPPoE Table 103 PPPoE IA Remote ID Sub option Format SubOpt Length Value The 1 in the first field identifies this as an Agent Circuit ID sub option and 2 identifies this as an Agent Remote ID sub option The next field specifies the length of the field The Switch takes the Circuit ID string you manually configure for a VLAN on a port as the highest priority and the Circuit ID string for a port as the second priority In addition the Switch puts the PPPoE client s MAC address into the Agent Remote ID Sub option if you do not specify any user defined string 29 1 2 1 Flexible Circuit ID Syntax with Identifier String and Variables If you do not configure a Circuit ID string for a VLAN on a specific port or for a specific port the Switch adds the user defined identifier string and variables into the Agent Circuit ID Sub option The variables can be the slot ID of the PPPoE client the port number of the PPPoE client and or the VLAN ID on the PPPoE packet The identifier string slot ID port number and VLAN ID are separated from each othe
207. damaged as it might cause electrocution If the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the device and the power source Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device Your product is marked with this symbol which is known as the WEEE mark WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately XS3900 48F User s Guide Index Numbers 802 1P priority 79 A access control limitations 276 login account 285 remote management 294 service port 293 SNMP 276 accounting setup 193 address learning MAC 90 92 Address Resolution Protocol ARP 309 311 312 administrator password 286 age 120 aggregator ID 135 137 aging time 74 applications bridging 21 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN 22 switched workgroup 22 ARP how it works 309 table 310 ARP Address Resolution Protocol 309 ARP inspection 200 203 and MAC filter 203 configuring 204 syslog messages 204 trusted ports 203 204 authentication and RADIUS 188 setup 193 authorization privilege levels 195 setup 193 automatic VLAN registra
208. del XS3900 48F User s Guide Basic Setting This chapter describes how to configure the System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup and Port Setup screens 6 1 Overview The System Info screen displays general Switch information such as firmware version number and hardware polling information such as fan speeds The General Setup screen allows you to configure general Switch identification information The General Setup screen also allows you to set the system time manually or get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your Switch The real time is then displayed in the Switch logs The Switch Setup screen allows you to set up and configure global Switch features The IP Setup screen allows you to configure Switch outband and inband IP addresses subnet mask s and DNS domain name server for management purposes The Port Setup screen allows you to enable or disable a port on the Switch and configure the port settings such as the speed and duplex mode 6 2 System Information In the navigation panel click Basic Setting gt System I nfo to display the screen as shown You can check the firmware version number and monitor the Switch temperature fan speeds and voltage in this screen Figure 22 Basic Setting gt System Info a xiu System Name XS3900 Product Model XS3900 48F ZyNOS F W Version V4 00 AAEW 0 b4 10 24 2012 Ethernet Address 00 19 cb 01 01 01 Hardware Monitor Temperature Unit
209. der Network XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 26 VLAN Mapping 26 2 Enabling VLAN Mapping Click Advanced Application and then VLAN Mapping in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 126 VLAN Mapping E VLAN Mapping VLAN Mapping Configure Active O Port Active On C Ml 4 WN d a o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 ee A aer c IIA Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 96 VLAN Mapping LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable VLAN mapping on the Switch Port This field displays the port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the VLAN mapping feature on this port Clear this check box to disable the VLAN mapping feature Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 26 VLAN Mapping 26 3 Configuring VLAN Mapping Click the VLAN Mapping Configure link in the VLAN Mapping
210. does not exist in the address table of a switch on the service provider s network Note All the edge switches in the service provider s network should be set to use the same MAC address for encapsulation Port This field displays the port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them CDP Select this option to have the Switch tunnel CDP Cisco Discovery Protocol packets so that other Cisco devices can be discovered through the service provider s network 230 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 27 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Table 98 Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling continued LABEL DESCRIPTION STP Select this option to have the Switch tunnel STP Spanning Tree Protocol packets so that STP can run properly across the service provider s network and spanning trees can be set up based on bridge information from all local and remote networks VTP Select this option to have the Switch tunnel VTP VLAN Trunking Protocol packets so that all customer switches can use consistent VLAN configuration through the service provider s network Point to Point The Switch supports PAgP Port Aggregation Protocol LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol and UDLD UniDirectional Link Detection tunneling for a point
211. ds Forwarding Delay 15 seconds Maximum hops 20 Configuration Name 0019cb004701 Revision Number 0 Cancel Instance Instance Bridge Priority 32768 v VLAN Range Start End Add Remove Clear Enabled VLAN s Port Active Priority Path Cost 1 128 2 128 3 128 4 O 128 4 5 128 4 6 128 H 7 12 Instance VLAN Active Port Delete 0 1 4094 z XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the MSTP Status screen see Figure 60 on page 123 Active Select this check box to activate MSTP on the Switch Clear this checkbox to disable MSTP on the Switch Note You must also activate Multiple Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable MSTP on the Switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds MaxAge This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the la
212. e Load Factory Default Click Here Save Configuration Config 1 Config 2 Reboot System Config 1 Config 2 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 125 Management gt Maintenance LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This field displays which configuration Configuration 1 or Configuration 2 is currently operating on the Switch Firmware Upgrade Restore Configuration Click Click Here to go to the Firmware Upgrade screen Click Click Here to go to the Restore Configuration screen Backup Configuration Click Click Here to go to the Backup Configuration screen Load Factory Default Click Click Here to reset the configuration to the factory default settings Save Configuration Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 1 on the Switch Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the Switch Reboot System Click Config 1 to reboot the system and load Configuration 1 on the Switch Click Config 2 to reboot the system and load Configuration 2 on the Switch Note Make sure to click the Save button in any screen to save your settings to the current configuration on the Switch XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 35 Maintenance 35 2 Load Factory Default Follow the steps below to reset the Switch back to the factory defaults 1 Inthe Maintenance screen click the Click He
213. e 108 root port 108 status 114 117 123 terminology 107 vs loop guard 220 subnet based VLANs 89 and DHCP VLAN 91 and priority 89 configuration 90 switch hardware overview 49 switch lockout 59 switch reset 59 switch setup 74 syslog 204 297 protocol 297 server setup 299 settings 298 setup 298 severity levels 297 system information 70 system log 296 system reboot 270 T TACACS 188 setup 191 XS3900 48F User s Guide Index TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus 187 tagged VLAN 81 temperature indicator 71 time current 73 time zone 73 Time RFC 868 72 time server 72 time service protocol 72 format 72 trademarks 321 transceiver installation 50 removal 50 transceiver ports connection speed 50 connector type 50 transceiver installation 50 Transceivers 49 traps destination 282 TRTCM and bandwidth control 260 and DiffServ 260 color aware mode 258 color blind mode 258 setup 259 trunk group 132 trunking 132 example 138 trusted ports ARP inspection 203 DHCP snooping 201 PPPoE IA 238 Tunnel Protocol Attribute and RADIUS 196 tutorials 25 DHCP snooping 25 Error Disable 38 PPPoE IA 33 Two Rate Three Color Marker TRTCM 257 Two Rate Three Color Marker see TRTCM 257 Type of Service ToS 256 U UDLD 231 UniDirectional Link Detection see UDLD untrusted ports ARP inspection 204 DHCP snooping 201 PPPoE IA 238 user profiles 187 V Vendor Specific Attribute See VSA
214. e DHCP Relay screen as shown Make sure you select the Option 82 check box to set the Switch to send additional information such as the VLAN ID together with the DHCP requests to the DHCP server This allows the DHCP server to assign the appropriate IP address according to the VLAN ID Figure 156 DHCP Relay Configuration Example LE DHCP Relay Status Active Vv Remote DHCP Server 1 192 168 1 100 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information iv Option 82 Information C 34 4 Configuring DHCP VLAN Settings Use this screen to configure your DHCP settings based on the VLAN domain of the DHCP clients Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel then click the VLAN link In the DHCP Status screen that displays XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 34 DHCP Note You must set up a management IP address for each VLAN that you want to configure DHCP settings for on the Switch See Section 6 6 on page 76 for information on how to do this Figure 157 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN a OXELECU Status VID Remote DHCP Server 1 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information Option 82 Information XS3900 Add Cancel Clear Type DHCP Status Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 124 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN
215. e VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Associated VLAN Enter the VLAN ID of a previously created VLAN here Note The VLAN ID and Mode selected here must be the same as the VLAN ID and VLAN Type created in Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN Tagged A VLAN ID tag identifies VLAN membership of a frame across switches Select this if the VLAN includes ports on multiple switches The Switch forwards tagged frames through this port it adds the PVID to untagged frames before sending them out Clear this if the VLAN includes ports on this Switch only The Switch forwards untagged frames through this port it removes the VLAN ID from tagged frames before sending them out Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide Static Route This chapter shows you how to configure static routes 32 1 Static Routing Overview The Switch uses IP for communication with management computers for example using HTTP Telnet SSH or SNMP Use IP static routes to have the Switch respond to remote management stations that are not reachable through the default gateway The Switch can also use static routes to send da
216. e ras 0 bin This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on the i Switch ras 0 is image 1 ras 1 is image 2 ras You can store up to two images or firmware files of the same device model on the Switch Only one image is used at a time Runthe boot image lt 1 2 gt command to specify which image is updated when firmware is loaded using the web configurator and to specify which image is loaded when the Switch starts up You can also use FTP commands to upload firmware to any image The Switch supports dual firmware images ras 0 and ras 1 You can switch from one to the other by using the boot image index command where index is 1 ras 0 or 2 ras 1 See the CLI Reference Guide for more information about using commands The system does not reboot after it switches from one image to the other 35 8 1 1 Example FTP Commands ftp put firmware bin ras 0 This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file firmware bin to the Switch ftp get config config cfg This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to a file called config cfg on your computer If your T FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source you will need to rename them as the Switch only recognizes config ras 0 and ras 1 Be sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use XS3900 48F User s Guide 273 Chapter 35 Maintenance
217. e the screen as shown Figure 52 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol a Spanning Tree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 0000 000000000000 Hello Time second 0 0 Max Age second D 0 Forwarding Delay second 0 0 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 This screen differs depending on which STP mode RSTP MRSTP or MSTP you configure on the Switch This screen is described in detail in the section that follows the configuration section for each STP mode Click Configuration to activate one of the STP standards on the Switch 11 3 Spanning Tree Configuration Use the Spanning Tree Configuration screen to activate one of the STP modes on the Switch Click Configuration in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 53 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration a Spanning Iree Configuration Status Spanning Tree Mode Rapid Spanning Tree C Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree C Multiple Spanning Tree Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 33 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Spanning Tree You can activate one of the STP modes on the Switch Mode Select Rapid Spanning Tree Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree or Mu
218. e user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device In essence RADIUS and TACACS authentication both allow you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central location The following table describes some key differences between RADIUS and TACACS Table 73 RADIUS vs TACACS RADIUS TACACS Transport UDP User Datagram Protocol TCP Transmission Control Protocol Protocol Encryption Encrypts the password sent for All communication between the client the authentication Switch and the TACACS server is encrypted 23 2 AAA Screens The AAA screens allow you to enable authentication authorization accounting or all of them on the Switch First configure your authentication and accounting server settings RADIUS TACACS or both and then set up the authentication priority activate authorization and configure accounting settings Click Advanced Application gt AAA in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 102 Advanced Application gt AAA x RADIUS Server Setup Click Here TACACS Server Setup Click Here AAA Setup Click Here 23 2 1 RADIUS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your RADIUS server settings See Section 23 1 2 on page 188 for more information on RADIUS servers and Section 23 3 on page 196 for RADIUS attributes utilized by the 188 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 23 AAA authentication and accounting features on the Swi
219. e your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 36 6 Remote Management From the Access Control screen display the Remote Management screen as shown next You can specify a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Click Access Control to return to the Access Control screen Figure 182 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management Remote Management Access Control Secured Client Setup Entry Active Start Address End Address Telnet FTP HTTP ICMP SNMP SSH HTTPS 1 v 0000 0 0 0 0 Ww M vu vi M M v 2 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O 3 O 0000 0 0 0 0 4 O 0000 0 0 0 0 O FE A 5 O 0000 0 0 0 0 rk mg m m m wm EFE 6 O 0000 0 0 0 0 y ommmmem m Fi 7 O 0000 0 0 0 0 8 O 0000 0 0 0 0 kk m m E E E E 9 0000 0 0 0 0 El E FH F 10 O 0000 0 0 0 0 NN gm E E Aa E 11 O 0000 0 0 0 0 ky m mum m m FN 12 0000 0 0 0 0 13 OF 00 00 0 0 0 0 O O 1 O 0000 0 0 0 0 E EE NE po O 15 O 0000 0 0 0 0 8 AO E FF Fl 16 O 00 00 0 0 0 0 E m n B E B XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 140 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management
220. ea Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router In MTU Multi Tenant Unit applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user on the same network XS3900 48F User s Guide 73 Chapter 6 Basic Setting VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast frames go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain Note VLAN is unidirectional it only governs outgoing traffic See Chapter 7 on page 81 for information on port based and 802 1Q tagged VLANs 6 5 Switch Setup Screen Click Basic Setting and then Switch Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown The VLAN setup screens change depending on whether you choose 802 1Q or Port Based in the VLAN Type field in this screen Refer to the chapter on VLAN Figure 24 Basic Setting gt Switch S
221. econds Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number T Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to activate STP on this port Edge Select this check box to configure a port
222. econds of the burst interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 7 2 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on each VLAN and to specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt VLAN Figure 119 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure ARF Inspection VLAN Configure Configure VLAN Start VID VID End VID Apply Enabled Log No y None Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 94 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each
223. ector if the traffic load to be monitored is more than one collector can manage Figure 133 Advanced Application gt sFlow gt Collector Collector 1 a xu HEN Collector Address 0 0 0 0 Index e A 6343 Collector Address UDP Port Delete 1 2 3 4 6343 O The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 100 Advanced Application gt sFlow gt Collector LABEL DESCRIPTION Collector Address Enter the IP address of the sFlow collector UDP Port Enter a UDP port number the Switch uses to send sFlow datagram to the collector If you change the port here make sure you change it on the collector too The default port is 6343 Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 28 sFlow Table 100 Advanced Application gt sFlow gt Collector continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of this entry Collector This field displays IP address of the sFlow collector Address UDP Port This field displays po
224. ed O Forbidden O Tx Tagging 2 O Normal O Fixed O Forbidden O Tx Tagging 3 Normal O Fixed Forbidden O Tx Tagging 4 9 Normal O Fixed O Forbidden v Tx Tagging 5 9 Normal O Fixed O Forbidden v Tx Tagging 6 9 Normal O Fixed O Forbidden v Tx Tagging 7 O Normal O Fixed O Forbidden v Tx Tagging 8 9 Normal O Fixed O Forbidden v Tx Tagging 9 M O Normal O Fixed O Forbidden Tx Tagging 10 O Normal O Fixed O Forbidden CAS O Tx Tagging a ug ASAS AA Oca Click the VLAN Status link in the Static VLAN screen and then the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen a BUEMEIUD VLAN Port Setting VLAN Search by VID The Number of VLAN 4 Index VID Elapsed Time Status 1 1 2 59 05 Static 2 102 2 59 05 Static 3 123 2 59 05 Static 4 200 0 00 07 Static Static VLAN Enter 200 in the PVID field for ports 1 2 3 and 10 to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on these ports so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 10 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory UA REDEE Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status GVRP Fi Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation A 1 O All y O O O O O O 2 O O O O 3 O O O O 4 O 1 O All Y O O 5 O 1 O All Y 1 O 6 L1 1 O Al O O Y O 1 O All oO L1 8 O 1 O All v O O 9 O 1 O All Y O O 11 E All Y
225. ed O Forbidden en AM P L E 5 a e 5 9 Normal Q Fixed O Forbidden Tx Tagging 6 Normal O Fixed Forbidden Y Tx Tagging XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials Note The VLAN Group ID field in this screen and the VID field in the IP Setup screen refer to the same VLAN ID 3 Since the VLAN2 network is connected to port 1 on the Switch select Fixed to configure port 1 to be a permanent member of the VLAN only 4 To ensure that VLAN unaware devices such as computers and hubs can receive frames properly clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending 5 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off 2 6 Setting Port VID Use PVID to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines In the example network configure 2 as the port VID on port 1 so that any untagged frames received on that port get sent to VLAN 2 Figure8 Initial Setup Network Example Port VID N gt Internet AN 2 DY VLAN2 no am uu hm 1 Click Advanced Applications and VLAN in aora the navigation panel Then click the VLAN ZEE Port Setting link Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vian VLAN Status Port Ingress Check 0 0 o 5
226. ed optical power received optical power and transceiver supply voltage is above or below a factory set normal range DDMIRxPowerEventClear DDMITemperatureEventClear DDMITxBiasEventClear DDMITxPowerEventClear DDMIVoltageEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 2 This trap is sent when all device operating parameters return to the normal operating range Table 132 AAA Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION authentication authenticationFailure 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 This trap is sent when authentication fails due to incorrect user name and or password AuthenticationFailureEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 1 This trap is sent when authentication fails due to incorrect user name and or password RADI USNotReachableEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 1 This trap is sent when there is no response message from the RADIUS server RADI USNotReachableEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 2 This trap is sent when the RADIUS server can be reached XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control Table 132 AAA Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION accounting RADI USAcctNotReachableEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 1 This trap is sent when there is no response message from the RADIUS accounting server RADI USAcctNotReachableEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 89
227. efore it gives up Abort timer This field displays how long in seconds the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping database after the current bindings change This section displays information about the current update and the next update of the DHCP snooping database Agent running This field displays the status of the current update or access of the DHCP snooping database none The Switch is not accessing the DHCP snooping database read The Switch is loading dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database write The Switch is updating the DHCP snooping database Delay timer expiry Abort timer expiry This field displays how much longer in seconds the Switch tries to complete the current update before it gives up It displays Not Running if the Switch is not updating the DHCP snooping database right now This field displays when in seconds the Switch is going to update the DHCP snooping database again It displays Not Running if the current bindings have not changed since the last update This section displays information about the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database Last succeeded time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database successfully Last failed time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database unsuccessfully Last failed reason This field displays the reason the Switch updated
228. eived Unicast This field shows the number of good unicast frames received Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast frames received Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast frames received Pause Pause is a flow control mechanism that notifies the sender to slow transmission if the receiver s buffers are almost full This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause frames received Priority This field shows the number of 802 1Qbb Pause frames received Pause Control This field shows the number of control frames received including those with CRC error but it does not include the 802 3x Pause frames TX Collision The following fields display information on collisions while transmitting Single This is a count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Multiple This is a count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission was inhibited by more than one collision Excessive This is a count of frames for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset Late This is the number of times a late collision is detected that is after 512 bits of the frames have already been transmitted Error Packet The following fields display detailed information about frames received that were in error
229. elete Cancel VLAN Stacking The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 66 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Selective QinQ LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this rule Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Port CVID The port number identifies the port you are configuring Enter a customer VLAN ID the inner VLAN tag from 1 to 4094 This is the VLAN tag carried in the packets from the subscribers 170 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking Table 66 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Selective QinQ continued LABEL DESCRIPTION SPVID SPVID is the service provider s VLAN ID the outer VLAN tag Enter the service provider I D from 1 to 4094 for frames received on this port See Chapter 7 on page 81 for more background information on VLAN ID Priority Select a priority level from O to 7 This is the service provider s priority level that adds to the frames received on this port 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel C
230. en Maintenance Access Control Diagnostic Syslog Cluster Management MAC Table ARP Table Configure Clone Port Authentication Port Security Classifier Policy Rule Queuing Method VLAN Stacking Multicast AAA IP Source Guard Loop Guard VLAN Mapping Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling sFlow PPPoE Errdisable Private VLAN The following table describes the links in the navigation panel Table 10 Navigation Panel Links LINK DESCRIPTION Basic Settings System Info This link takes you to a screen that displays general system and hardware monitoring information General Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general identification information and time settings for the Switch Switch Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can set up global Switch parameters such as VLAN type MAC address learning GARP and priority queues IP Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IP address subnet mask necessary for Switch management and DNS domain name server and set up to 64 IP routing domains Port Setup This link takes you to screens where you can configure speed flow control and priority settings for individual Switch ports Advanced Application VLAN This link takes you to screens where you can configure port based or 802 1Q VLAN depending on what you configured in the Switch Setup menu
231. en to configure clustering management Click Configuration from the Cluster Management screen to display the next screen Figure 190 Management gt Clustering Management gt Configuration Name VID 1 List Index MacAddr 1 00 13 49 aetb 7a EE Clustering Management Configuration Clustering Manager Active Vv Password Add Cancel Refresh Status Model ES 2024PWR O Name Remove ES 2024PWR XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 39 Cluster Management The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 148 Management gt Clustering Management gt Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Clustering Manager Active Select Active to have this Switch become the cluster manager switch A cluster can only have one manager Other directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidates list If a switch that was previously a cluster member is later set to become a cluster manager then its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen appears in the member summary list below Name Type a name to identify the Clustering Manager You may use up to 32 printable characters spaces are allowed VID This is the VLAN ID and is only applicable if the Switch is set to 802 1Q VLAN All switches must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong to the same cluster Switches that are not in
232. enabled or not Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Mode This field displays the MVR mode Source Port This field displays the source port number s Receiver Port This field displays the receiver port number s 802 1p This field displays the priority level Delete To delete a multicast VLAN s select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 22 8 MVR Group Configuration All source ports and receiver ports belonging to a multicast group can receive multicast data sent to this multicast group Configure MVR IP multicast group address es in the Group Configuration screen Click Group Configuration in the MVR screen XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Note A port can belong to more than one multicast VLAN However IP multicast group addresses in different multicast VLANs cannot overlap Figure 96 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration aD Group Configuration MVR Multicast VLAN ID Name Start Address End Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 72 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration L
233. ent after a failed authentication exchange Tx period Specify the number of seconds the Switch waits for client s response before re sending an identity request to the client Supp Timeout Specify the number of seconds the Switch waits for client s response to a challenge request before sending another request Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 16 2 2 Guest VLAN When 802 1x port authentication is enabled on the Switch and its ports clients that do not have the correct credentials are blocked from using the port s You can configure your Switch to have one VLAN that acts as a guest VLAN If you enable the guest VLAN 102 in the example on a port 2 in the example the user A in the example that is not IEEE 802 1x capable or fails to enter the correct username and password can still access the port but traffic from the user is forwarded to the guest VLAN That is unauthenticated users can have access to limited network resources in the same guest VLAN such as the Internet The rights granted to the Guest VLAN depends on how the network administrator configures switches or routers with the guest network feature Figure 73 Gues
234. er adaptor or cord is connected to the Switch and plugged in to an appropriate power source Make sure the power source is turned on 4 Turn the Switch off and on 5 Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch in AC models or if the AC power supply is connected in AC DC models 6 If the problem continues contact the vendor One of the LEDs does not behave as expected 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED See Section 3 3 on page 52 2 Check the hardware connections See Section 3 1 on page 49 3 Inspect your cables for damage Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables 4 Turn the Switch off and on in DC models or if the DC power supply is connected in AC DC models XS3900 48F User s Guide 313 Chapter 43 Troubleshooting 5 Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch in AC models or if the AC power supply is connected in AC DC models 6 If the problem continues contact the vendor 43 2 Switch Access and Login forgot the IP address for the Switch 1 The default in band IP address is 192 168 1 1 2 Use the console port to log in to the Switch 3 Use the MGMT port to log in to the Switch the default IP address of the MGMT port is 192 168 0 1 4 I f this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 4 6 on page 59 forgot the username and or password 1 The default username is admi
235. er and a receiver Use a transceiver to connect a fiber optic cable to the Switch The Switch does not come with transceivers You must use transceivers that comply with the Small XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 3 Switch Hardware Overview Form Factor Pluggable SFP Transceiver Multisource Agreement MSA See the SFF committee s INF 8074i specification Rev 1 0 for details You can change transceivers while the Switch is operating You can use different transceivers to connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber optic connectors Type SFP or QSFP connection interface Connection speed 1 10 or 40 Gigabit per second Gbps To avoid possible eye injury do not look into an operating fiber optic module s connectors 3 1 1 1 Transceiver Installation Use the following steps to install a Q SFP transceiver the graphics are indicative only 1 Insert the transceiver into the slot with the exposed section of PCB board facing down Figure 10 Transceiver Installation Example a 2 Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place 3 The Switch automatically detects the installed transceiver Check the LEDs to verify that it is functioning properly Figure 11 Installed Transceiver 3 1 1 2 Transceiver Removal Use the following steps to remove a Q SFP transceiver XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 3 Switch Hardware Overview 1 Open the transceiver s latch latch styles vary Figu
236. er specifies the IP network address of the final destination Address IP Subnet Enter the subnet mask for this destination Routing is always based on network Mask number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your Address Switch that will forward the packet to the destination The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your Switch Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Add Click Add to insert a new static route to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the above fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the route Click a number to edit the static route entry Active This field displa
237. es if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide VLAN Mapping This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN mapping on the Switch 26 1 VLAN Mapping Overview With VLAN mapping enabled the Switch can map the VLAN ID and priority level of packets received from a private network to those used in the service provider s network The Switch checks incoming traffic from the switch ports non management ports against the VLAN mapping table first the MAC learning table and then the VLAN table before forwarding them through the Gigabit uplink port When VLAN mapping is enabled the Switch discards the tagged packets that do not match an entry in the VLAN mapping table If the incoming packets are untagged the Switch adds a PVID based on the VLAN setting Note You can not enable VLAN mapping and VLAN stacking at the same time 26 1 1 VLAN Mapping Example In the following example figure packets that carry VLAN ID 12 and are received on port 3 match a pre configured VLAN mapping rule The Switch translates the VLAN ID from 12 into 123 before forwarding the packets Any packets carrying a VLAN tag other than 12 such as 10 and received on port 3 will be dropped Figure 125 VLAN mapping example Service Provi
238. es the labels in this screen Table 110 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt CPU protection LABEL DESCRIPTION Reason Select the type of control packet you want to configure here Port This field displays the port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments to each port if necessary Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Rate Limit pkt Enter a number from O to 256 to specify how many control packets this port can receive or S transmit per second O means no rate limit You can configure the action that the Switch takes when the limit is exceeded See Section 30 5 on page 246 for detailed information Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 30 5 Error Disable Detect Configuration Use this screen to have the Switch detect whether the control packets exceed the rate limit configured for a port and configure the action to take once the limit is exceeded Click the Click Here link next to Errdisable Detect link in the Advanced Application gt Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown Figure 14
239. esponse from the first RADIUS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second RADIUS server Index This is a read only number representing a RADIUS server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS server for authentication is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the Switch XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 23 AAA Table 74 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup continued Shared Secret LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Use this section to configure your RADIUS accounting server settings Server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that
240. ess mapping s and remove specific dynamic ARP entries Figure 193 Management gt ARP Table EXACT Condition Index IP Address MAC Address VID Port Type 1 D AQ 19 cb 6f 91 59 1 0 static 2 1994 9X X M P L E90 39 co 6r91 59 1 0 static 3 1392459448 66 21 85 0c 44 4b 1 8 dynamic 4 192 168 10 2 00 19 cb 6 91 59 102 0 static The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 150 Management gt ARP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Condition Specify how you want the Switch to remove ARP entries when you click Flush Select All to remove all of the dynamic entries from the ARP table Select IP Address and enter an IP address to remove the dynamic entries learned with the specified IP address Select Port and enter a port number to remove the dynamic entries learned on the specified port Flush Click Flush to remove the ARP entries according to the condition you specified Cancel Click Cancel to return the fields to the factory defaults Index This is the ARP table entry number IP Address This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a Switch port with the corresponding MAC address below MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with the corresponding IP address above VID This field displays the VLAN to which the device belongs Port This field displays the port to which the device connects CPU means this learned IP address is the Switch s management IP address Ty
241. ess shown in the next field will be forwarded Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XS3900 48F User s Guide Static Multicast Forward Setup Use these screens to configure static multicast address forwarding 9 1 Static Multicast Forwarding Overview A multicast MAC address is the MAC address of a member of a multicast group A static multicast address is a multicast MAC address that has been manually entered in the multicast table Static multicast addresses do not age out Static multicast forwarding allows you the administrator to forward multicast frames to a member without the member having to join the group first If a multicast group has no members then the switch will either flood the multicast frames to all ports or drop them You can configure this in the Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting screen see Section 22 3 on page 174 Figure 42 shows such unknown multicast frames flooded to all ports With static multicast forwarding you can forward these multicasts to port s within a VLAN group Figure 43 shows frames being forwarded to devices connected to port 3 Figure 44 shows frames being forwarded to ports 2 and 3 within VLAN group 4 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 9 Static Multicast Forward Setup Figure 42 No Static Multicast Forwarding 9 2 Configuring Static Multicast Forwarding Use thi
242. etting the same for all entries Use this row first and then make adjustments to each entry if necessary Note Changes in this row are copied to all the entries as soon as you make them XS3900 48F User s Guide 247 Chapter 30 Error Disable Table 112 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Recovery continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Timer Status Select this option to allow the Switch to wait for the specified time interval to activate a port or allow specific packets on a port after the error was gone Deselect this option to turn off this rule Interval Enter the number of seconds from 30 to 2592000 for the time interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide Private VLAN 31 1 Private VLAN Overview Use private VLAN if you want you to block traffic between ports in the same VLAN Community and Isolated VLANs are secondary private VLANs that must be associated with a Primary private VLAN Primary Ports in a Primary VLAN are promiscuous and they can communicate with all promiscuous ports in the same primary VLAN and all ports in associated community and isola
243. etup VLAN Type MAC Address Learning GARP Timer Priority Queue Assignment Level a ENTE 802 10 Port Based Bridge Control Protocol Transparency Active Aging Time Join Timer Leave Timer Leave All Timer c Leve Leve Leve Leve Leve 2 N oto e M Leve Level Apply w eol2lol eolo 300 seconds 200 milliseconds 600 milliseconds 10000 milliseconds Me x x IR IR PRI The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Choose 802 1Q or Port Based The VLAN Setup screen changes depending on whether you choose 802 1Q VLAN type or Port Based VLAN type in this screen See Chapter 7 on page 81 for more information Bridge Control Select Active to allow the Switch to handle bridging control protocols STP for example Protocol You also need to define how to treat a BPDU in the Port Setup screen Transparency MAC Address MAC address learning reduces outgoing traffic broadcasts For MAC address learning to Learning occur on a port the port must be active Aging Time Enter a time from 10 to 1000000 seconds This is how long all dynamically learned MAC addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out and must be relearned XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 6 Basic Setting Table 15 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup continued
244. evel as the unique number for the MST region VLAN to MST Instance mapping 11 1 5 3 MST Instance An MST Instance MSTI is a spanning tree instance VLANs can be configured to run on a specific MSTI Each created MSTI is identified by a unique number known as an MST ID known internally to a region Thus an MSTI does not span across MST regions The following figure shows an example where there are two MST regions Regions 1 and 2 have 2 spanning tree instances Figure 50 MSTIs in Different Regions Physical Connection Region 2 MSTI 2 11 1 5 4 Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST A CIST represents the connectivity of the entire network and it is equivalent to a spanning tree in an STP RSTP The CIST is the default MST instance MSTID 0 Any VLANs that are not members of an MST instance are members of the CIST In an MSTP enabled network there is only one CIST that runs between MST regions and single spanning tree devices A network may contain multiple MST regions and other network segments running RSTP Figure 51 MSTP and Legacy RSTP Network Example Region 3 Region 2 Physical Connection RSTP on the Link XS3900 48F User s Guide EN Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 11 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen The Spanning Tree Protocol status screen changes depending on what standard you choose to implement on your network Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol to se
245. ew login accounts on the Switch but user B cannot The Switch can authorize users based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself or it can use an external server to authorize a large number of users Accounting is the process of recording what a user is doing The Switch can use an external server to track when users log in log out execute commands and so on Accounting can also record system related actions such as boot up and shut down times of the Switch The external servers that perform authentication authorization and accounting functions are known as AAA servers The Switch supports RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service see Section 23 1 2 on page 188 and TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus see Section 23 1 2 on page 188 as external authentication authorization and accounting servers Figure 101 AAA Server EA CERHEHHUBIHEHHS IM Clien AAA Server f 23 1 1 Local User Accounts By storing user profiles locally on the Switch your Switch is able to authenticate and authorize users without interacting with a network AAA server However there is a limit on the number of users you may authenticate in this way See Chapter 36 on page 276 XS3900 48F User s Guide 187 Chapter 23 AAA 23 1 2 RADIUS and TACACS RADIUS and TACACS are security protocols used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of or in addition to an internal devic
246. f 100 Add ports 5 6 and 7 in the VLAN by selecting Fixed in the Control field as shown Deselect Tx Tagging because you don t want outgoing traffic to contain this VLAN tag Click Add Ea aD ACTIVE eas on VLAN Group ID 100 E Name 2 Normal Aca ance VLAN Status VLAN Type O Private Y Association VLAN List Port Control Tagging Normal v v Tx Tagging 1 Normal O Fixed O Forbidden v Tx Tagging 2 Normal O Fixed O Forbidden v Tx Tagging 3 O Normal O Fixed O Forbidden v Tx Tagging y Fixed O Forbidden Y Tx ging 5 O Normal O Fixed O Forbidden O Tx Tagging 6 O Normal O Fixed O Forbidden O Tx Tagging 7 O Normal gt Fixed O Forbidden Tx Tagging 3 Goto Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting and set the PVID of the ports 5 6 and 7 to 100 This tags untagged incoming frames on ports 5 6 and 7 with the tag 100 E VLAN Port Setting GVRP O Subnet Based Vian Port Ingress Check PVID r 1 GVRP Acceptable Frame Type Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Trunking O 2 3 4 5 6 7 ap 0 a30 0 0 0 I 1 E EHE EI UNA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 VLAN Status Isolation r AO Oe else Apply Cancel XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 4 Goto Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP snooping gt Configure activate and specify VLAN 100 as the DH
247. g table describes the labels in this screen Table 109 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to configure in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below Apply Click Apply to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Use this row to make the setting the same for all VLANs Use this row first and then make adjustments on a VLAN by VLAN basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the VLANs as soon as you make them Enabled Select this option to turn on the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on a VLAN Circuit id Select this option to make the Circuit ID settings for a specific VLAN take effect Remote id Select this option to make the Remote ID settings for a specific VLAN take effect Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh
248. gress rate limits on this port Egress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the out going traffic flow on a port XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 12 Bandwidth Control Table 41 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide 127 Broadcast Storm Control This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the broadcast storm control feature 13 1 Broadcast Storm Control Setup Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast multicast and destination lookup failure DLF packets the Switch receives per second on the ports When the maximum number of allowable broadcast multicast and or DLF packets is reached per second the subsequent packets are discarded Enable this feature to reduce broadcast multicast and or DLF packets in your network You can specify limits for each packet type on each port Click Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 62 Advanced Application gt Broadcast
249. gs out via the console port telnet or SSH e Dotlx Configure the Switch to send information when an IEEE 802 1x client begins a session authenticates via the Switch ends a session as well as interim updates of a session Commands Configure the Switch to send information when commands of specified privilege level and higher are executed on the Switch Active Select this to activate accounting for a specified event types Broadcast Select this to have the Switch send accounting information to all configured accounting servers at the same time If you don t select this and you have two accounting servers set up then the Switch sends information to the first accounting server and if it doesn t get a response from the accounting server then it tries the second accounting server XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 23 AAA Table 76 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode The Switch supports two modes of recording login events Select e start stop to have the Switch send information to the accounting server when a user begins a session during a user s session if it lasts past the Update Period and when a user ends a session stop only to have the Switch send information to the accounting server only when a user ends a session Method Select whether you want to use RADIUS or TACACS for accounting of specific types of events TACACS is the only method for rec
250. gs of the peer port are the same in order to connect Both 1000 Auto and 1000M Full Duplex operate at 1Gbps speed in full duplex mode The differences are as follows Table 17 1000 Auto Vs 1000M Full Duplex SWITCH PEER RESULT 1000 Auto Auto Link 1000 Auto 1000M Full Fixed Link unsure Depends on peer hardware 1000M Full Duplex Auto Link unsure Depends on peer hardware 1000M Full Duplex 1000M Full Fixed Link Click Basic Setting gt Port Setup in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen Figure 26 Basic Setting gt Port Setup A PortSetup Port Active Name Type Speed Duplex Fow 902 1p sinis Media Type Control Priority Control O 1000 Auto v O 0 y Peer v sfp plus v 1 v 1000M 10G 10G Full Duplex O 0 y Peer v isfp_ plus v 2 B 1000M 10G 10G Full Duplex v O 0 Peer v sfp plus v 3 v 1000M 10G 10G FulDuplex O Ov Peer v sfp plus v 4 v 1000M 10G 10G FulDuplex o 0 Peer v sfp plus v 5 v 1000M 10G 10G FulDuplex v o Ov Peer v sfp plus v 6 v 1000M 10G 10G Full Duplex Y O Ov Peer v sfp_plus v 7 v 1000M 10G 10G Full Duplex o 0 v Peer v sfp plus v 8 Ea 1000M 10G 10G Full Duplex vy o Ov Peer v sfp_ plus v 9 v 1000M 10G 10G Full Duplex o Og Peer v sfp plus v 00 E 1000M 10G 10G FulDupex O 0 v Peer v sfp plus v 11 v 1000M 10G 10G Full Duplex o Ov Peer v sfp plus v 12 Y 1000M 10G 10G Full Duplex O 0 y
251. gt Intermediate Agent gt Port screen or for a specific VLAN on a port in the Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN screen has priority over this That means if you also want to configure PPPoE IA Per Port or Per Port Per VLAN setting leave the fields here empty and configure circuit id and remote id in the Per Port or Per Port Per VLAN screen Active Select this option to have the Switch add the user defined identifier string and variables specified in the option field to PADI or PADR packets from PPPoE clients If you leave this option unselected and do not configure any Circuit ID string using CLI commands on the Switch the Switch will use the string specified in the access node identifier field identifier string Specify a string that the Switch adds in the Agent Circuit ID sub option You can enter up to 53 ASCII characters Spaces are allowed option Select the variables that you want the Switch to generate and add in the Agent Circuit ID sub option The variable options include sp sv pv and spv which indicate combinations of slot port slot VLAN port VLAN and slot port VLAN respectively The Switch enters a zero into the PADI and PADR packets for the slot value delimiter Select a delimiter to separate the identifier string slot ID port number and or VLAN ID from each other You can use a pound key semi colon period comma forward
252. hat the device can generate Active Select this option to set the device to generate logs for the corresponding category Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 38 Syslog 38 3 Syslog Server Setup Click Management gt Syslog gt Syslog Server Setup to open the following screen Use this screen to configure a list of external syslog servers Figure 185 Management gt Syslog gt Server Setup Server Address Log Level Index Active e Syslog Server Setup Syslog Setup Active 1 0 0 0 0 Level 0 y Add Cancel Clear IP Address Log Level Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 144 Management gt Syslog gt Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to have the device send logs to this syslog server Clear the check box if you want to create a syslog server entry but not have the device send logs to it you can
253. he current one Agent URL Enter the location of the DHCP snooping database The location should be expressed like this tftp domain name or IP address directory if applicable file name for example tftp 192 168 10 1 database txt Timeout interval Enter how long 10 65535 seconds the Switch tries to complete a specific update in the DHCP snooping database before it gives up Write delay Enter how long 10 65535 seconds the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping interval database the first time the current bindings change after an update Once the next update is scheduled additional changes in current bindings are automatically included in the next update XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Table 86 DHCP Snooping Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Renew DHCP Snooping URL Enter the location of a DHCP snooping database and click Renew if you want the Switch to load it You can use this to load dynamic bindings from a different DHCP snooping database than the one specified in Agent URL When the Switch loads dynamic bindings from a DHCP snooping database it does not discard the current dynamic bindings first If there is a conflict the Switch keeps the dynamic binding in volatile memory and updates the Binding collisions counter in the DHCP Snooping screen Section 24 4 on page 207 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time
254. he ID that identifies the VLAN group here If you don t have a specific target VLAN enter 1 Port Enter the port s where frames with destination MAC address that matched the entry above are forwarded You can enter multiple ports separated by no space comma or hyphen For example enter 3 5 for ports 3 4 and 5 Enter 3 5 7 for ports 3 5 and 7 Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this rule if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults Index Click an index number to modify a static multicast MAC address rule for port s Active This field displays whether a static multicast MAC address forwarding rule is active Yes or not No You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for a static multicast MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address This field displays the multicast MAC address that identifies a multicast group VID This field displays the ID number of a VLAN group to which frames containing the specified multicast MAC address will be forwarded XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 9 Static Multicast Forw
255. he contents of the SNMP messages are encrypted only the intended recipients can read them XS3900 48F User s Guide 277 Chapter 36 Access Control 36 3 2 Supported MIBs MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance The Switch supports the following MIBs SNMP MIB II RFC 1213 RFC 1157 SNMP v1 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs RFC 1155 SMI RFC 2674 SNMPv2 SNMPv2c RFC 1757 RMON e SNMPv2 SNMPv2c or later version compliant with RFC 2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP RFC 2012 SNMPv2 MIB for TCP RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP 36 3 3 SNMP Traps The Switch sends traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs The following tables outline the SNMP traps by category An OID Object ID that begins with 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 is defined in private MIBs Otherwise it is a standard MIB OID Note The OIDs beginning with 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 are specific to the XS3900 48F switch Table 130 SNMP System Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION coldstart coldStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 This trap is sent when the Switch is turned on warmstart warmStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 This trap is sent when the Switch restarts fanspeed FanSpeedEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 1 This trap is sent when the fan speed goes above or below the normal operating range FanSpeedEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 2 This trap is sent when t
256. he edge of your network Figure 120 Loop Guard vs STP Pee eee Loop guard is designed to handle loop problems on the edge of your network This can occur when a port is connected to a Switch that is in a loop state Loop state occurs as a result of human error It happens when two ports on a switch are connected with the same cable When a switch in loop state sends out broadcast messages the messages loop back to the switch and are re broadcast again and again causing a broadcast storm If a switch not in loop state connects to a switch in loop state then it will be affected by the switch in loop state in the following way t will receive broadcast messages sent out from the switch in loop state t will receive its own broadcast messages that it sends out as they loop back It will then re broadcast those messages again XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 25 Loop Guard The following figure shows port N on switch A connected to switch B Switch B is in loop state When broadcast or multicast packets leave port N and reach switch B they are sent back to port N on A as they are rebroadcast from B Figure 121 Switch in Loop State The loop guard feature checks to see if a loop guard enabled port is connected to a switch in loop state This is accomplished by periodically sending a probe packet and seeing if the packet returns on the same port If this is the case the Switch will shut down the port connected to the sw
257. he fan speed returns to the normal operating range temperature TemperatureEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 1 This trap is sent when the temperature goes above or below the normal operating range TemperatureEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 2 This trap is sent when the temperature returns to the normal operating range voltage VoltageEventOn VoltageEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 2 This trap is sent when the voltage goes above or below the normal operating range This trap is sent when the voltage returns to the normal operating range 278 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control Table 130 SNMP System Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION fanairflow FanAirFlowEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 1 Fan module and power module fan air flow must be in the same direction front to back or back to front on the same Switch This trap is sent when the airflows are not in the same direction FanAirFlowEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 2 Fan module and power module fan air flow must be in the same direction front to back or back to front on the same Switch This trap is sent when the airflows return to the same direction reset UncontrolledResetEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 1 This trap is sent when the Switch automatically resets
258. he labels in this screen Table 52 Advanced Application gt Port Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Port List Enter the number of the port s separated by a comma on which you want to enable port security and disable MAC address learning After you click MAC freeze all previously learned MAC addresses on the specified port s will become static MAC addresses and display in the Static MAC Forwarding screen MAC freeze Click MAC freeze to have the Switch automatically select the Active check boxes and clear the Address Learning check boxes only for the ports specified in the Port list Active Select this option to enable port security on the Switch Port This field displays a port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some of the settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the port security feature on this port The Switch forwards packets whose MAC address es is in the MAC address table on this port Packets with no matching MAC address es are dropped Clear this check box to disable the port security feature The Switch forwards all packets on this port Address Learning MAC address learning reduces outgoing broadcast traffic For MAC
259. he query message to all hosts connected to the port and waits for IGMP reports from hosts to update the forwarding table This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port from a host Fast Leave Enter an IGMP fast leave timeout value from 200 to 6 348 800 in miliseconds Select this option to have the Switch use this timeout to update the forwarding table for the port In fast leave mode right after receiving an IGMP leave message from a host on a port the Switch itself sends out an IGMP Group Specific Query GSQ message to determine whether other hosts connected to the port should remain in the specific multicast group This helps speed up the leave process This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port from a host Group Limited Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Max Group Num Enter the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Once a port is registered in the specified number of multicast groups any new IGMP join report frame s is dropped on this port XS3900 48F User s Guide 175 Chapter 22 Multicast Table 68 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting continued LAB
260. he user name and password correctly The default user name is admin and the default password is 1234 These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 2 You may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions Close other Telnet session s or try connecting again later Check that you have enabled logins for HTTP or Telnet If you have configured a secured client IP address your computer s IP address must match it Refer to the chapter on access control for details 3 Disconnect and re connect the cord to the Switch 4 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 4 6 on page 59 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device JavaScripts enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default cannot see some submenus at the bottom of the navigation panel The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels Adjust the value in your computer and then you should see the rest of the submenus at the bottom of the navigation panel There is unauthorized access to my Switch via telnet HTTP and SSH XS3900 48F User s Guide 315 Chapter 43 Troubleshooting Click the Display button in the System Log field in the Management gt Diagnostic screen to check for unauthorized access to your Switch To avoid unauthorize
261. hen you create a multicast VLAN in this screen Figure 95 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Port A1 MN Fw NO VLAN Active A UI Multicast Setting Group Configuration Active o Name Multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority lo y Mode Dynamic C Compatible Source Port Receiver Port None Tagging None y C 9 9 9 a 50 0 0 0 0 0 0 o AOE Oo EE oo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel Name Mode Source Port Receiver Port 802 1p Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 71 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR 802 1p Priority LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable MVR to allow one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Multicast VLAN Enter the VLAN ID 1 to 4094 of the multicast VLAN ID Select a priority level 0 7 with which the Switch replaces the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets belonging to this multicast VLAN Mode Specify the MVR mode on the Switch Choices are Dynamic and Compatible Select Dynamic to send IGMP reports to all MVR source ports in the multicast VLAN Select Compatible to set the Switch not to send IGMP reports Port This field displays the port number on the Swit
262. hentication server The Switch supports the following methods for port authentication e EEE 802 1x An authentication server validates access to a port based on a username and password provided by the user MAC An authentication server validates access to a port based on the MAC address and password of the client Both types of authentication use the RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 protocol to validate users See Section 23 1 2 on page 188 for more information on configuring your RADIUS server settings If you enable IEEE 802 1x authentication and MAC authentication on the same port the Switch performs IEEE 802 1x authentication first If a user fails to authenticate via the IEEE 802 1x method then access to the port is denied IEEE 802 1x Authentication The following figure illustrates how a client connecting to an IEEE 802 1x authentication enabled port goes through a validation process The Switch prompts the client for login information in the form of a user name and password after the client responds to its identity request When the client 2 Atthe time of writing IEEE 802 1x is not supported by all operating systems See your operating system documentation If your operating system does not support 802 1x then you may need to install 802 1x client software XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication provides the login credentials the Switch sends an authentica
263. hernet link is up LinkDownEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 2 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up linkdown linkDown 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down LinkDownEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 1 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down XS3900 48F User s Guide 279 Chapter 36 Access Control Table 131 SNMP InterfaceTraps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION autonegotiation AutonegotiationFailedEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 1 This trap is sent when an Ethernet interface fails to auto negotiate with the peer Ethernet interface AutonegotiationFailedEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 2 This trap is sent when an Ethernet interface auto negotiates with the peer Ethernet interface lldp transceiver ddm lldpRemTablesChange DDMIRxPowerEventOn DDMITemperatureEventOn DDMITxBiasEventOn DDMITxPowerEventOn DDMIVoltageEventOn 1 0 8802 1 1 2 0 0 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 74 31 2 1 The trap is sent when entries in the remote database have any updates Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP defined as IEEE 802 1ab enables LAN devices that support LLDP to exchange their configured settings This helps eliminate configuration mismatch issues This trap is sent when one of the device operating parameters such as transceiver temperature laser bias current transmitt
264. his check box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address Enter the MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs Note Static MAC addresses do not age out VID Enter the VLAN identification number Port Enter the port where the MAC address entered in the previous field will be automatically forwarded Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this rule if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults Index Click an index number to modify a static MAC address rule for a port Active This field displays whether this static MAC address forwarding rule is active Yes or not No You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address This field displays the MAC address that will be forwarded and the VLAN identification number to which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Port This field displays the port where the MAC addr
265. his to clear the Delete check boxes above 24 6 1 ARP Inspection VLAN Status Use this screen to look at various statistics about ARP packets in each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt VLAN Status Figure 115 ARP Inspection VLAN Status a OES VLAN Status eng Status Enabled VLAN Show VLAN range C Selected VLAN Start vip End vi Apply VID Received Request Reply Forwarded Dropped The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 90 ARP Inspection VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN range Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to look at in the section below Enabled VLAN Select this to look at all the VLANs on which ARP inspection is enabled in the section below Selected VLAN Select this to look at all the VLANs in a specific range in the section below Then enter the lowest VLAN ID Start VI D and the highest VLAN ID End VID you want to look at Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above Received This field displays the total number of ARP packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Table 90 ARP Inspection VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Request This field displays the total number
266. iber Channel over Ethernet transparently encapsulates fiber channel traffic into Ethernet so that you don t need separate fiber channel and Ethernet switches Data Center Bridging DCB enhances Ethernet technology to adapt to the FCoE It supports lossless Ethernet traffic no frames discarded when there is network congestion and can allocate bandwidth for different traffic classes based on IEEE802 1p priority with a guaranteed minimum bandwidth LAN traffic large number of flows and not latency sensitive SAN traffic Storage Area Network large packet sizes and requires lossless performance and IPC traffic Inter Process Communication latency sensitive messages can share the same physical connection while still having its own priority and guaranteed minimum bandwidth The following figure shows an example deployment for the Switch using DCB XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch Ethernet Fiber Channel Data Center d The following table explains the acronyms in the graphic Table 1 DCB Graphic Key LABEL DESCRIPTION EES Enhanced Ethernet Switch LLAN Legacy Local Area Network Ethernet ELAN Enhanced LAN Ethernet amp FCoE FCF Fiber Channel Forwarder SAN Storage Access Network 1 2 1 PFC ETS and DCBX Standards DCB may use PFC ETS application priority and DCBX to adapt to the FCoE XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know You
267. ic Select Change the DSCP value to replace the DSCP field with the value specified in the Out of profile DSCP field Select Set Out Drop Precedence to mark out of profile traffic and drop it when network is congested Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to queue the frames that are marked to be dropped Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 19 3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Policy screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the Index field Figure 82 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule Summary Table Index Active 1 Yes Name Classifier s Delete Test Example O Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59 Policy Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the policy index number Click an index number to edit the policy Active This field displays Ye
268. if 1 is entered for unicast traffic and 2 is entered for non unicast then two thirds of the bandwidth on this port is available for non unicast traffic Non Enter a default weight for broadcast or multicast traffic from this port The weight is the ratio of Unicast unicast traffic to non unicast traffic The allowed range is from 1 to 127 For example if 1 is Weight entered for unicast traffic and 2 is entered for non unicast then two thirds of the bandwidth on this port is available for non unicast traffic Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide VLAN Stacking This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN stacking on your Switch See the chapter on VLANs for more background information on Virtual LAN 21 1 VLAN Stacking Overview A service provider can use VLAN stacking to allow it to distinguish multiple customers VLANs even those with the same customer assigned VLAN ID within its network Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames that enter the network By tagging the tagged frames double tagged frames the service provider can manage up to 4 094 V
269. iguring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Index This is the number of the VLAN mapping entry in the table Active This shows whether this entry is activated or not Name This is the descriptive name for this rule Port This is the port number to which this rule is applied VID This is the customer VLAN ID in the incoming packets Translated VID This is the VLAN ID that replaces the customer VLAN ID in the tagged packets Priority This is the priority level that replaces the customer priority level in the tagged packets Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 26 VLAN Mapping XS3900 48F User s Guide 227 27 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling This chapter shows you how to configure layer 2 protocol tunneling on the Switch 27 1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Overview Layer 2 protocol tunneling L2PT is used on the service provider s edge devices L2PT allows edge switches 1 and 2 in the following figure to tunnel layer 2 STP Spanning Tree Protocol CDP Cisco Discovery Protocol and VTP VLAN Trunking Protocol packets between customer switches A B and C in the following figure connected through the service provider s network The edge switch encapsulates layer 2 protocol packets with a specific MAC address bef
270. iguring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Index This field displays the index number of an entry IP Address This field displays IP address of the Switch in the IP domain IP Subnet This field displays the subnet mask of the Switch in the IP domain Mask VID This field displays the VLAN identification number of the IP domain on the Switch Default This field displays the the IP address of the default outgoing gateway Gateway Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Note Deleting all IP subnets locks you out of the Switch Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XS3900 48F User s Guide 77 Chapter 6 Basic Setting 6 7 Port Setup Use this screen to configure Switch port settings 6 7 1 Auto negotiation Auto negotiation allows one port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support When auto negotiation is turned on a port on the Switch negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode If the peer port does not support auto negotiation or turns off this feature the Switch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode When the Switch s auto negotiation is turned off a port uses the pre configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection thus requiring you to make sure that the settin
271. ime 73 DCBX 18 DHCP 263 configuration options 263 relay example 267 setup 266 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 263 DHCP relay option 82 202 DHCP snooping 25 200 201 configuring 202 DHCP relay option 82 202 trusted ports 201 untrusted ports 201 DHCP snooping database 201 diagnostics 296 Ethernet port test 296 ping 296 system log 296 Differentiated Service DiffServ 256 DiffServ 256 activate 258 and TRTCM 260 DS field 256 DSCP 256 DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping 261 network example 256 PHB 256 Direct Attach Copper DAC 49 79 disclaimer 321 documentation related 2 double tagged frames 165 DS Differentiated Services 256 DSCP DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping 261 service level 256 what it does 256 DSCP DiffServ Code Point 256 dynamic link aggregation 132 E egress port 98 Error Disable 38 error disable detect 246 error disable recovery configuration 247 overview 244 Ethernet broadcast address 309 Ethernet port test 296 ETS 18 external authentication server 188 XS3900 48F User s Guide Index F fan speed 71 file transfer using FTP command example 273 filename convention configuration configuration file names 273 filtering 105 rules 105 filtering database MAC table 306 firmware 71 upgrade 271 303 flow control 79 back pressure 79 IEEE802 3x 79 forwarding delay 120 frames tagged 89 untagged 89 front panel 49 FTP 23 273 file transfer procedure 274 restrictions over WAN
272. imit Number Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 53 Advanced Application gt Port Security gt VLAN MAC Address Limit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to activate this rule Port Enter the number of the port to which this rule is applied VID Enter the VLAN identification number Limit Number Use this field to limit the number of dynamic MAC addresses that may be learned on a port in a specified VLAN For example if you set this field to 5 on port 2 then only the devices with these five learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time A sixth device would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses aged out MAC address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen The valid range is from 0 to 16384 0 means this feature is disabled Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to change the settings Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when
273. ing 149 MAC address learning 148 overview 148 setup 148 222 230 XS3900 48F User s Guide 327 Index port setup 78 port status 65 port VLAN trunking 83 port based VLAN 95 all connected 98 port isolation 98 settings wizard 98 ports standby 132 diagnostics 296 mirroring 130 speed duplex 79 power voltage 71 power status 71 PPPoE lA 33 trusted ports 238 untrusted ports 238 priority level 75 priority queue assignment 75 Private VLAN Status 94 product registration 321 protocol based VLAN 91 and IEEE 802 1Q tagging 91 example 93 hexadecimal notation for protocols 91 92 isolate traffic 91 priority 91 92 PVID 81 89 PVID Priority Frame 81 Q QoS and classifier 151 QSFP 49 queue weight 163 queuing 162 SPQ 163 WFQ 163 WRR 163 queuing method 162 164 R RADIUS 188 advantages 188 and authentication 188 Network example 187 server 188 settings 188 setup 188 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See RSTP 107 reboot load configuration 270 reboot system 270 Reference Guide CLI 2 registration product 321 related documentation 2 remote management 294 service 295 trusted computers 295 resetting 59 270 to factory default settings 270 restoring configuration 59 272 RFC 3164 297 Round Robin Scheduling 163 RSTP 107 S save configuration 59 270 Secure Shell See SSH service access control 293 service port 294 sFlow 232 collector 234 configuration 233 datagram 232 overview 2
274. ing table describes the labels in this screen Table 36 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the MRSTP Status screen see Figure 55 on page 115 Tree This is a read only index number of the STP trees Active Select this check box to activate an STP tree Clear this checkbox to disable an STP tree Note You must also activate Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable MRSTP on the Switch Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 36 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 s
275. ion The layer 2 multicast MAC addresses used by Cisco layer 2 protocols 01 00 0C CC CC CC and 01 00 0C CC CC CD are also included in this group Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives a frame with a reserved multicast address Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Immed Leave Select this option to set the Switch to remove this port from the multicast tree when an IGMP version 2 leave message is received on this port Select this option if there is only one host connected to this port Normal Leave Enter an IGMP normal leave timeout value from 200 to 6 348 800 in miliseconds Select this option to have the Switch use this timeout to update the forwarding table for the port In normal leave mode when the Switch receives an IGMP leave message from a host on a port it forwards the message to the multicast router The multicast router then sends out an IGMP Group Specific Query GSQ message to determine whether other hosts connected to the port should remain in the specific multicast group The Switch forwards t
276. ion is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 JavaScript enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default 4 2 System Login 1 Start your web browser 2 Type http and the IP address of the Switch for example the default management IP address is 192 168 1 1 through an in band non MGMT port and 192 168 0 1 through the MGMT port in the Location or Address field Press ENTER XS3900 48F User s Guide EN Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 3 The login screen appears The default username is admin and associated default password is 1234 The date and time display as shown if you have not configured a time server nor manually entered a time and date in the General Setup screen Figure 15 Web Configurator Login Connect to 192 168 0 1 The server 192 168 0 1 at XG54700 at Thu Jan 1 00 04 31 1970 requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection User name admin Password Remember my password 4 Click OK to view the first web configurator screen 4 3 The Web Configurator Layout The Status screen is the first screen that displays when you access the web configurator ERN XS3
277. itch in loop state The following figure shows a loop guard enabled port N on switch A sending a probe packet P to switch B Since switch B is in loop state the probe packet P returns to port N on A The Switch then shuts down port N to ensure that the rest of the network is not affected by the switch in loop state Figure 122 Loop Guard Probe Packet A B Nara c Nae The Switch also shuts down port N if the probe packet returns to switch A on any other port In other words loop guard also protects against standard network loops The following figure illustrates three switches forming a loop A sample path of the loop guard probe packet is also shown In this example the probe packet is sent from port N and returns on another port As long as loop guard is enabled on port N The Switch will shut down port N if it detects that the probe packet has returned to the Switch Figure 123 Loop Guard Network Loop XS3900 48F User s Guide 221 Chapter 25 Loop Guard Note After resolving the loop problem on your network you can re activate the disabled port via the web configurator see Section 6 7 on page 78 or via commands see the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide 25 2 Loop Guard Setup Click Advanced Application gt Loop Guard in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Note The loop guard feature can not be enabled on the po
278. kets such as BPDU on the port rate limitation The Switch drops the additional control packets the port has to handle in every one second Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 30 6 Error Disable Recovery Configuration Use this screen to to configure the Switch to automatically undo an action after the error is gone Click the Click Here link next to Errdisable Recovery in the Advanced Application gt Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown Figure 142 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Recovery ISTE SES Errdisable Active E Reason Timer Status Interval gt O loopguard F 300 ARP F 300 BPDU O 300 IGMP O 300 Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 112 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Recovery LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to turn on the error disable recovery function on the Switch Reason This field displays the supported features that allow the Switch to shut down a port or discard packets on a port according to the feature requirements and what action you configure Use this row to make the s
279. l traffic from MAC address 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 on port 2 Figure 80 Classifier Example OECD Active Vv Name Example Packet Format All m VLAN ji ad Cc i Any Prior iad c fox All y Ethernet Type C others Hex Layer 2 MAC Add bibis ress C mac 00 50 ba fed at e1 Sourc Port O Ari ce 2 Destinat MAC Add iva estination ress C mac RE E D RD DSCP ay E c 1 All Establish Only IP Protocol C others Dec IP Address 0 0 0 0 Layer 3 Address Prefix t Source oe c Any ocket Number Cc IP Address 0 0 0 0 Address Prefix Destination HEU G Any ocket Number c After you have configured a classifier you can configure a policy to define action s on the classified traffic flow See Chapter 19 on page 157 for information on configuring a policy rule XS3900 48F User s Guide Policy Rule This chapter shows you how to configure policy rules 19 1 Policy Rules Overview A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria refer to Chapter 18 on page 151 for more information A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested treatment in the network 19 1 1 DiffServ DiffServ Differentiated Services is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow P
280. lay the screen as shown Figure 137 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN VLAN Port Show Port Port Show VLAN Start VID End VID Port 2 VID Circuit id Remote id 10 11 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 108 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Show Port Enter a port number to show the PPPoE Intermediate Agent settings for the specified VLAN s on the port Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to configure in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below Apply Click Apply to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below Port This field displays the port number specified above VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Use this row to make the setting the same for all VLANs Use this row first and then make adjustments on a VLAN by VLAN basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the VLANs as soon as you make them Circuit id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Circuit ID sub option for this VLAN on the specified port Spaces are allowed The Circui
281. lete Cancel XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 70 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes To configure additional rule s for a profile that you have already added enter the profile name and specify a different IP multicast address range Start Address Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile End Address Type the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile If you want to add a single multicast IP address enter it in both the Start Address and End Address fields Add Clear Click Add to save the profile to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults Profile Name Start Address This field displays the descriptive name of the profile This field displays the start of the multicast address range End Address This field displays the end of the multicast address range
282. lick Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Refresh Click Refresh to perform auto discovery again to list potential cluster members The next summary table shows the information for the clustering members configured Index This is the index number of a cluster member switch MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This is the cluster member switch s model name Remove Select this checkbox and then click the Remove button to remove a cluster member switch from the cluster Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide MAC Table This chapter introduces the MAC Table screen 40 1 MAC Table Overview 1 2 The MAC Table screen a MAC table is also known as a filtering database shows how frames are forwarded or filtered across the Switch s ports When a device which may belong to a VLAN group sends a packet which is forwarded to a port on the Switch the MAC address of the device is shown on the Switch s MAC Table It also shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or
283. lick Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Index This is the number of the selective VLAN stacking rule Active This shows whether this rule is activated or not Name This is the descriptive name for this rule Port This is the port number to which this rule is applied CVID This is the customer VLAN ID in the incoming packets SPVID This is the service provider s VLAN ID that adds to the packets from the subscribers Priority This is the service provider s priority level in the packets Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XS3900 48F User s Guide 171 Multicast This chapter shows you how to configure various multicast features 22 1 Multicast Overview Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender to 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender to everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data Refer to RFC 1112 RFC 2236 and RFC 3376 for information on IGMP versions 1 2 and 3 respectively 22 1 1 IP Multicast Addresses In IPv4 a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a spe
284. ll as reboot the system Access Control This link takes you to screens where you can change the system login password and configure SNMP and remote management Diagnostic This link takes you to screens where you can view system logs and can test port s Syslog This link takes you to screens where you can setup system logs and a system log server Cluster This link takes you to a screen where you can configure clustering management and view Management its status MAC Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC address and VLAN ID of a device attach to a port You can also view what kind of MAC address it is ARP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC address IP address Configure Clone resolution table This link takes you to a screen where you can copy attributes of one port to an other port s 4 3 1 Change Your Password After you log in for the first time it is recommended you change the default administrator password Click Management gt Access Control gt Logins to display the next screen Figure 17 Change Administrator Login Password ED Logins ng Administrator Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Edit Logins Login 1 3 4 User Name Password Access Control Retype to confirm XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 4 The We
285. lowing table describes the labels in this screen Table 21 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Status Click this to go to the VLAN Status screen VLAN Detail VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Port This column displays the ports that are participating in a VLAN A tagged port is marked as Number T an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as Elapsed This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN Time was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch Dynamic using GVRP Static manually added as a normal entry Private manually added as a private VLAN primary isolated or community MVR added via Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Private VLAN These fields show private VLAN information for the selected VLAN See Chapter 29 on page Status 236 for more information on private VLANs Primary This field shows the primary VLAN ID in the selected VLAN VLAN Secondary This field shows the secondary VLAN ID in the selected VLAN VLAN Type This field shows the type of private VLAN Primary Community or Isolated Port List This shows the ports mapped to the private VLAN using the Advanced Application gt Private VLAN or Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN screen Change Pages Use the Previous and Nex
286. ltiple Spanning Tree See Section 11 1 on page 107 for background information on STP Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 11 4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Use this screen to configure RSTP settings see Section 11 1 on page 107 for more information on RSTP Click RSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen Figure 54 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP a OLS Eire Status Active Bridge Priority 32768 v Hello Time 2 Seconds MAX Age 20 Seconds Forwarding Delay 15 Seconds Port Active Edge Priority Path Cost 4 v 128 4 2 v 128 H 3 v 128 4 4 Y 128 5 v 128 E 6 v 128 4 Y 128 4 8 Y 128 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 34 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the RSTP Status screen see Figure 55 on page 115 Active Select this check box to activate RSTP Clear this
287. lves two separate steps Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows Configure policy rules to define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow refer to Chapter 19 on page 157 to configure policy rules 18 2 Configuring the Classifier Use the Classifier screen to define the classifiers After you define the classifier you can specify actions or policy to act upon the traffic that matches the rules To configure policy rules refer to Chapter 19 on page 157 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 18 Classifier Click Advanced Application gt Classifier in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 78 Advanced Application gt Classifier A Classifier Active O Name Packet Format Au VLAN gt sd of Priority x any c pH E e AI y S Ethernet Type O olors A Hen MAC Address SS Source cwep E SEG GE OG Port pes o 7 Destination MAC Address S Any C mc sp sp sb E DSCP i any plL Sor amp All y FT Establish Only C Others Dec IP Address T Address Prefix 10090 il Source G Any Socket Number of IP Address unas Address Prefix 2097 4 Destination G Any Socket Number cf Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name Rule Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 54 Advanced Application gt Classifier LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable this rule
288. mation on disabling multi login 36 2 The Access Control Main Screen Click Management gt Access Control in the navigation panel to display the main screen as shown Figure 166 Management gt Access Control EH Access Control SNMP Click Here Logins Click Here Service Access Control Click Here Remote Management Click Here 36 3 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol used to manage and monitor TCP I P based devices SNMP is used to exchange management information between the network management system NMS and a network element NE A manager station can manage and monitor the Switch through the network via SNMP version 1 SNMPv1 SNMP version 2c or XS3900 48F User s Guide 276 Chapter 36 Access Control SNMP version 3 The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured Figure 167 SNMP Management Model Manager an Agent Agent Agent Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main components agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed Switch the Switch An agent translates the local management information from the managed Switch into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control
289. ment gt Access Control gt SNMP gt User screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 36 3 5 Configuring SNMP Trap Group From the SNMP scr een click Trap Group to view the screen as shown Use the Trap Group screen to specify the types of SNMP traps that should be sent to each SNMP manager Figure 169 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group AECE Trap Destination IP Type System Interface AAA IP Switch SNMP Setting Options coldstart warmstart fanspeed temperature voltage reset timesync loopguard errdisable fanairflow linkup linkdown autonegotiation lidp transceiver ddm authentication accounting ping traceroute stp mactable rmon cfm Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 136 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group LABEL Trap Destination IP DESCRIPTION Select one of your configured trap destination IP addresses These are the IP addresses of the SNMP managers You must first configure a trap destination IP address in the SNMP Setting screen Use the rest of the screen to select which traps the Switch
290. ments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Ingress Check If this check box is selected for a port the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not include this port in its member set Clear this check box to disable ingress filtering XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 7 VLAN Table 23 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION PVID A PVID Port VLAN ID is a tag that adds to incoming untagged frames received on a port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines Enter a number between 1 and 4094 as the port VLAN ID GVRP Select this check box to allow GVRP on this port Acceptable Frame Specify the type of frames allowed on a port Choices are All Tag Only and Untag Only Type yR Select All from the drop down list box to accept all untagged or tagged frames on this port This is the default setting Select Tag Only to accept only tagged frames on this port All untagged frames will be dropped Select Untag Only to accept only untagged frames on this port All tagged frames will be dropped VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers but not ports directly connected to end users to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through the Switch Isolation Select this to allows this port to
291. mes belonging to this VLAN Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Index This is the index number identifying this protocol based VLAN Click on any of these numbers to edit an existing protocol based VLAN Active This field shows whether the protocol based VLAN is active or not Port This field shows which port belongs to this protocol based VLAN Name This field shows the name the protocol based VLAN Ethernet type This field shows which Ethernet protocol is part of this protocol based VLAN VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the port Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this protocol based VLAN Delete Click this to delete the protocol based VLANs which you marked for deletion Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 7 5 6 2 Create an IP based VLAN Example This example shows you how to create an IP VLAN which includes ports 1 4 and 8 Follow these steps using the screen below 1 Activate this protocol based VLAN 2 Type the port number you want to include in this protocol based VLAN Type 1 3 Give this protocol based VLAN a descriptive name
292. mmit Rate Active Peak Rate sid siii r Kbps Kbps O Kbps 1 m t Js E 1 Kbps Ese M H le r 1 Ks T f Kbps p r hm 5 1 Ks O f Kops i n Kbps r 1 Kbps n 1 Kbps i o h lw r 1 kos O Kbps E 1 laps r 1 Kbps n 4 Kbps 7 O hh Kbps E 1 Kbps E odi mate A SE i Apply Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 41 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable bandwidth control on the Switch Port This field displays the port number i Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Ingress Rate Active Select this check box to activate commit rate limits on this port Commit Specify the guaranteed bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the incoming Rate traffic flow on a port The commit rate should be less than the peak rate The sum of commit rates cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth Active Select this check box to activate peak rate limits on this port Peak Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the incoming traffic flow on a port Active Select this check box to activate e
293. n 119 122 configuration digest 124 forwarding delay 120 Hello Time 123 hello time 120 Max Age 123 max age 120 max hops 120 MST region 110 network example 110 path cost 121 port priority 121 revision level 120 MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 107 MTU Multi Tenant Unit 73 multicast 172 802 1 priority 174 and IGMP 172 IGMP throttling 176 IP addresses 172 overview 172 setup 174 multicast group 178 multicast VLAN 183 Multiple Spanning Tree Instance See MSTI 109 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 108 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol See MSTP 107 Multiple STP 108 Multiple STP see MSTP 109 MVR 179 configuration 181 group configuration 183 network example 179 MVR Multicast VLAN Registration 179 N network management system NMS 276 NTP RFC 1305 72 O other documentation 2 P PAGP 231 password 58 administrator 286 PHB Per Hop Behavior 256 ping test connection 296 policy 158 160 and classifier 158 and DiffServ 157 configuration 158 example 161 overview 157 rules 157 viewing 160 policy configuration 160 Port Aggregation Protocol see PAgP port authentication 140 and RADIUS 188 1EEE802 1x 143 146 191 MAC authentication 141 port based VLAN type 74 port cloning 311 312 advanced settings 311 312 basic settings 311 312 port details 66 port isolation 98 port mirroring 130 direction 131 egress 131 ingress 131 port redundancy 132 port security 148 address learning 149 limit MAC address learn
294. n and the default password is 1234 2 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 4 6 on page 59 cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address The default in band IP address is 192 168 1 1 f you changed the IP address use the new IP address f you changed the IP address and have forgotten it see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the Switch 2 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See Section 3 3 on page 52 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled 4 Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the Switch If you know that there are routers between your computer and the Switch skip this step XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 43 Troubleshooting 5 Reset the device to its factory defaults and try to access the Switch with the default IP address See Section 4 6 on page 59 6 If the problem continues contact the vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions Try to access the Switch using another service such as Telnet If you can access the Switch check the remote management settings to find out why the Switch does not respond to HTTP can see the Login screen but cannot log in to the Switch 1 Make sure you have entered t
295. nally if it is below the CIR then it is marked green Figure 148 TRTCM Color blind Mode Exceed NO 33 2 2 TRTCM Color aware Mode In color aware mode the evaluation of the packets uses the existing packet loss priority TRTCM can increase a packet loss priority of a packet but it cannot decrease it Packets that have been previously marked red or yellow can only be marked with an equal or higher packet loss priority Packets marked red high packet loss priority continue to be red without evaluation against the PIR or CIR Packets marked yellow can only be marked red or remain yellow so they are only evaluated against the PIR Only the packets marked green are first evaluated against the PIR and then if they don t exceed the PIR level are they evaluated against the CIR Figure 149 TRTCM Color aware Mode 33 3 Activating DiffServ Activate DiffServ to apply marking rules or IEEE 802 1p priority mapping on the selected port s XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 33 Differentiated Services Click IP Application gt DiffServ in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 150 IP Application gt DiffServ A Diffserv J 2 rate 3 Color Marker DSCP Setting Active Ci Port Active 1 O 2 O 3 C 4 C 5 O 6 E A a omssmmmmuin p alse eke seque Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 117 P Application gt DiffServ LABEL
296. ncel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide DHCP This chapter shows you how to configure the DHCP feature 34 1 DHCP Overview DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual computers to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server When you configure the Switch as a relay agent then the Switch forwards DHCP requests to DHCP server on your network If you don t configure the Switch as a relay agent then you must have a DHCP server in the broadcast domain of the client computers or else the client computers must be configured manually 34 1 1 DHCP Configuration Options The DHCP configuration on the Switch is divided into Global and VLAN screens The screen you should use for configuration depends on the DHCP services you want to offer the DHCP clients on your network Choose the configuration screen based on the following criteria Global The Switch forwards all DHCP requests to the same DHCP server VLAN The Switch is configured on a VLAN by VLAN basis 34 2 DHCP Status Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel The DHCP Status screen displays Figure 153 IP Application gt DHCP Status DHCP Status nd Relay Status Relay Mode The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 121 P Application gt DHCP Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Relay Status This section displays co
297. ndex This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to edit the rule Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purposes only Rule This field displays a summary of the classifier rule s settings Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes The following table shows some other common Ethernet types and the corresponding protocol number Table 56 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number ETHERNET TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER IP ETHII 0800 X 75 Internet 0801 NBS Internet 0802 ECMA Internet 0803 Chaosnet 0804 X 25 Level 3 0805 XNS Compat 0807 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 18 Classifier Table 56 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number ETHERNET TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER Banyan Systems OBAD BBN Simnet 5208 IBM SNA 80D5 AppleTalk AARP 80F3 Some of the most common IP ports are Table 57 Common IP Ports PORT NUMBER PORT NAME 21 FTP 23 Telnet 25 SMTP 53 DNS 80 HTTP 110 POP3 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 18 Classifier 18 4 Classifier Example The following screen shows an example of configuring a classifier that identifies al
298. neral MYR Ganora erica 181 226 NNR ROU Cmr ci 183 22 0 1 MYR Configuration CAI pr 184 Chapter 23 ETERNI TU T UI ULL 187 23 1 Authentication Authorization and Accounting AAA sessssseeee enne 187 291 1 Local User oiii e vader teaacnaniiys 187 eo L2 PAUS and PALMS quide p ebd aote ir und dar e Di eer nsn au 188 Be ARA orco Nom 188 23 RADIUS GREE SIUE es 188 2322 IUE d c Oe cci c o ipaniueodu lo is 191 Ede DAPUX adi s 193 E25 Vendor Spacie AIDE iiec PIU a Pen vaste nO Dore oe tiu A oen RA RS Prndi i IN LU 195 23 8 5 Wine Proto AUNDI lt a 196 239 Suppe RADIOS AD e 196 23 3 1 Attributes Used for fati CDI rr Ad 197 KciRCNAUIeTrcaNt cR Wrap cL a 197 Chapter 24 IP Source Gual S 200 TP Source Guard OIE Mc 200 24 1 1 IP So rce GUI Menu OVanieW vos dar bdo Dress iab kanaa ae d a 201 262 DACP Shooting OVVIE ee aaae anai aa a danas 201 A012 BAP Inspestiom CAPS auaina EEA ii 203 EP DOES OU I dia 204 ss M 205 BR DA ses URN ea sh uss adu o oe 207 45 DHCP SlIBDPIhO CORB sisi dd 209 2 Sl DAD npo POL CODO LIFE a Ead ad ru E REIP pad cna anne dr RR peices 211 2452 DAGP Snooping VLAN CODIQUEE psi 212 246 s diri e 213 XS3900 48F User s Guide Table of Contents 246 ARP Inspection VLAN SUITES iusso pro aa dao ecc pras cda aiti a bed kr bc a 214 A Rs ls
299. nfiguration settings related to the Switch s DHCP relay mode Relay Mode This field displays None if the Switch is not configured as a DHCP relay agent Global if the Switch is configured as a DHCP relay agent only VLAN followed by a VLAN ID or multiple VLAN IDs if it is configured as a relay agent for specific VLAN s XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 34 DHCP 34 3 DHCP Relay Configure DHCP relay on the Switch if the DHCP clients and the DHCP server are not in the same broadcast domain During the initial IP address leasing the Switch helps to relay network information such as the IP address and subnet mask between a DHCP client and a DHCP server Once the DHCP client obtains an IP address and can connect to the network network information renewal is done between the DHCP client and the DHCP server without the help of the Switch The Switch can be configured as a global DHCP relay This means that the Switch forwards all DHCP requests from all domains to the same DHCP server You can also configure the Switch to relay DHCP information based on the VLAN membership of the DHCP clients 34 3 1 DHCP Relay Agent Information The Switch can add information about the source of client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server by adding Relay Agent Information This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests The DHCP server can then provide an IP address based on this information Please refe
300. ng Tree Protocol RSTP Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 0000 000000000000 Hello Time second D 0 Max Age second 0 0 Forwarding Delay second 0 0 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click RSTP to edit RSTP settings on the Switch Max Age second Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of the bridge priority plus the MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a configuration second message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding Delay second This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding See Section 11 1 3 on page 108 for information on port states
301. ng it is willing to accept PFC priorities from the peer Switch B s local priorities are 0 and 1 and Willing field is set to false meaning it is not willing to accept PFC priorities from the peer switch A Switch A will use switch B s configured priorities O and 1 Switch A LLDP PDU Switch B LLDP PDU PFC TLV 3 4 5 Willing True PFC TLV 0 1 Willing False PFC TLV 0 1 Willing True If both switches are configured to accept configuration auto on both switches then the configuration of the switch with the lowest MAC address hex value sum is used Verify configurations by displaying all port and Switch local and peer LLDP information Local port and Switch configuration and statistics can also be viewed Note At the time of writing DCB is configured using the Command Line Interface CLI only See the CLI reference guide for details and usage examples 1 3 Bridging Example In this example the Switch connects different company departments RD and Sales to the corporate backbone It can alleviate bandwidth contention and eliminate server and network bottlenecks All users that need high bandwidth can connect to high speed department servers via the Switch You can provide a super fast uplink connection by using the optional 10 Gigabit uplink module on the Switch Figure 1 Bridging Application ory TA A OU XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
302. nge to keep the priority setting of the frames Select Set the packet s 802 1p priority to replace the packet s 802 1p priority field with the value you set in the Priority field Select Send the packet to priority queue to put the packets in the designated queue Select Replace the 802 1p priority field with the IP TOS value to replace the packet s 802 1p priority field with the value you set in the TOS field Diffserv Select No change to keep the TOS and or DSCP fields in the packets Select Set the packet s TOS field to set the TOS field with the value you configure in the TOS field Select Replace the I P TOS with the 802 1p priority value to replace the TOS field with the value you configure in the Priority field Select Set the Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame to set the DSCP field with the value you configure in the DSCP field Outgoing Select Send the packet to the mirror port to send the packet to the mirror port Select Send the packet to the egress port to send the packet to the egress port Metering Select Enable to activate bandwidth limitation on the traffic flow s then set the actions to be taken on out of profile packets XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 19 Policy Rule Table 58 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Out of profile action Select the action s to be performed for out of profile traffic Select Drop the packet to discard the out of profile traff
303. nges to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide 147 17 Port Security This chapter shows you how to set up port security 17 1 About Port Security Port security allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch The Switch can learn up to 32K MAC addresses in total with no limit on individual ports other than the sum cannot exceed 32K For maximum port security enable this feature disable MAC address learning and configure static MAC address es for a port It is not recommended you disable port security together with MAC address learning as this will result in many broadcasts By default MAC address learning is still enabled even though the port security is not activated 17 2 Port Security Setup Click Advanced Application gt Port Security in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 76 Advanced Application gt Port Security a OLE VLAN MAC Address Limit MAC Freeze Port List MAC freeze Port Security Active 1 Port Active Address Learning Limited Number of Learned MAC Address r 7 1 m Ie IT 2 m 2 fa 3 rH e Do 4 K E LO A A AIA Nnn AA apr NEP act NP Ms an a Apply Cancel XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 17 Port Security The following table describes t
304. nt the Switch to wait for a period of time 10 minutes before resuming the port automatically after the problem s are gone Loop guard and Errdiable features are helpful for this demand Note Refer to Section 25 2 on page 222 and Section 30 2 on page 244 for more information about Loop Guard and Errdiable To configure the settings First click Advanced Application gt Loop Guard Select the Active option in the first section to enable loop guard on the Switch Then select the Active option of the first entry port to enable loop guard for all ports Click Apply ESTEE mn amp WN Oo on om ERIS E EK RII E XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2 Click Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt CPU Protection select ARP as the reason enter 100 as the rate limit packets per second for the first entry port to apply the setting to all ports Then click Apply a Errdisable CAT Pont Rate Limit pkt s 1 LM 2 ARE 3 100 4 1100 5 100 6 MtMPMENS 7 100 8 100 9 100 10 100 11 100 12 100 42 100 3 Click Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Detect select Active for cause ARP and inactive port as the mode Then click Apply a disable D Cause Active Mode o inactive port _ v inactive port BPDU a Linactive pon IGMP o inactive port Errdisable v v v Fi 4 Click Advanced Application
305. o M 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PVID 1 J 1 J mmm All All All All All All All au AA E Al anum Al aaa GVRP Acceptable Frame Type v E VLAN Trunking Isolation 2 All EXAMP Ho rri Enter 2 in the PVI D field for port 1 and click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2 7 How to Set Up a Guest VLAN All ports on the Switch are in VLAN 1 by default Say you enable IEEE 802 1x authentication on ports 1 to 8 Clients that connect to these ports should provide the correct user name and password in order to access the ports You want to assign clients that connect to ports 1 2 or 3 to a guest VLAN 200 for example before they can authenticate with the authentication server In this guest VLAN clients can surf the Internet through the default gateway attached to port 10 but are not allowed to access other network resources such as the mail server or local data base Guest VLAN 200 Internet y Ports 1 2 3 and 10 _ 2 7 1 Creating a Guest VLAN Follow the steps below to configure port 1 2 3 and 10 as a member of VLAN 200 1 Access the web configurat
306. of the configured MVR multicast group addresses on the Switch an entry is created in the forwarding table on the Switch This maps the subscriber VLAN to the list of forwarding destinations for the specified multicast traffic When the subscriber changes the channel or turns off the computer an IGMP leave message is sent to the Switch to leave the multicast group The Switch sends a query to VLAN 1 on the receiver port in this case an uplink port on the Switch If there is another subscriber device connected to this XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast port in the same subscriber VLAN the receiving port will still be on the list of forwarding destination for the multicast traffic Otherwise the Switch removes the receiver port from the forwarding table Figure 94 MVR Multicast Television Example foes mm iid VLAN1 Multicast VLAN S a c j gt N i ile T i A F p 4 ee ee ee ee 22 7 General MVR Configuration Use the MVR screen to create multicast VLANs and select the receiver port s and a source port for each multicast VLAN Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR link to display the screen as shown next Note You can create up to five multicast VLANs and up to 256 multicast rules on the Switch XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Note Your Switch automatically creates a static VLAN with the same VID w
307. oint to the same Ethernet switch and configure the ports for LACP trunking LACP only works on full duplex links All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media type speed duplex mode and flow control settings XS3900 48F User s Guide 132 Chapter 15 Link Aggregation Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the Ethernet switch to avoid causing network topology loops 15 2 1 Link Aggregation ID LACP aggregation ID consists of the following information Table 44 Link Aggregation ID Local Switch 15 3 Link Aggregation Status SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 Table 45 Link Aggregation ID Peer Switch SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation in the navigation panel The Link Aggregation Status screen displays by default See Section 15 1 on page 132 for more information Figure 64 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status Link Aggregation Status g Link Aggregation Setting Group Enabled Synchronized x ID Ports Ports Aggregator ID Criteria Status T1 4 src dst mac Static 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 e 3 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000j 9 d9tmac LACP T3 src dst mac T4 src dst mac T5 src dst mac T6 src dst mac T7 src dst mac T8
308. ommunity The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 22 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION ACTIVE Select this check box to activate the VLAN settings Name Enter a descriptive name for the VLAN group for identification purposes This name consists of up to 64 printable characters spaces are allowed VLAN Group ID Enter the VLAN ID for this static entry the valid range is between 1 and 4094 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 7 VLAN Table 22 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Select Normal static or Private For Private VLANs select Primary Isolated or Community Association VLAN List Primary private VLANs can associate with several secondary Community private VLANs and up to one secondary Isolated private VLAN You only configure VLAN Association List for Primary private VLANs Use a dash to associate consecutive VLANs and a comma no spaces to associate non consecutive VLANs For example 51 53 includes 51 52 and 53 but 51 53 does not inlcude 52 Secondary private VLANs can only be associated with one primary private VLAN Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common se
309. on and Accounting screen to view the screen as shown Figure 104 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup Accounting Server OD TACACS Server Setup Authentication Server Mode index priority Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address TCP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 ag O 2 0 0 0 0 49 O Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address TCP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 49 C 2 0 0 0 0 49 Im Auth and Acct Apply Cancel Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 75 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to configure your TACACS authentication settings Server Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple TACACS servers Select index priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured TACACS server if the TACACS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second TACACS server Select round robin to alternate between the TACACS servers that it sends authentication requests to Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request response from the TACACS server If you are using two TACACS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two TACACS servers For example if you set the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a
310. one Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last selected static binding or if not applicable to clear the fields above XS3900 48F User s Guide 205 Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Table 84 P Source Guard Static Binding continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding Lease This field displays how long the binding is valid Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator VLAN This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 4 DHCP Snooping Use this screen to look at various statistics about the DHCP snooping database To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping Figure 110 DHCP Snooping 1 DHCP Snooping HN NP Configure IPS
311. onfigure IPSG VID Port Expiry sec Reason Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 89 ARP Inspection Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Total number of This field displays the current number of MAC address filters that were created because filters the Switch identified unauthorized ARP packets Index This field displays a sequential number for each MAC address filter MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the MAC address filter VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the MAC address filter XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Table 89 ARP Inspection Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the source port of the discarded ARP packet Expiry sec This field displays how long in seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch You can also delete the record manually Delete Reason This field displays the reason the ARP packet was discarded MAC VLAN The MAC address and VLAN ID were not in the binding table IP The MAC address and VLAN ID were in the binding table but the IP address was not valid Port The MAC address VLAN ID and IP address were in the binding table but the port number was not valid Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Delete Click this to remove the selected entries Cancel Click t
312. ontrol OEA suce ccs ces netur v te teta atra dus vais duda et da ERR CURE V aad EL cuan 287 A E T 287 A Nm 288 36 5 3 Configuring Service Port Access Gonirol rias dices eiiie iniii 293 36 6 Remote Management as 294 Chapter 37 CI ta 296 E A UOS 296 Chapter 38 enea A 297 eel VSI IIS eR M N 297 e gt MN RET o OUT 298 85 8 Syd SEEN CORDE rn di 299 Chapter 39 Custer Managsmiebl iuuenis p i k2 DIA UU eM dad pe ER ISI SK MM n ILE Dici M p DPA MIR A A E 300 XS3900 48F User s Guide EM Table of Contents 39 1 Clustering Management Status Overview ssssssssssssssseseeernee enne 300 uot EUST MANE MEN SS sra masked cnius a birra raped as GR etam cud o 301 38 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Managemehf iuueni errem anaes 302 39 3 Clustering Management ConfipulaliDll a A vanni tinea 304 Chapter 40 MAS o P Y X M 306 AI Table RS ai 306 MZ MSI e NAG Table sa 307 Chapter 41 Li Mi nn Et 309 PET ABRP Table CON NO a ai 309 BAVA AGU re mr 309 aL Th ARF Table GOGEN rra ll op UG HER UR c Da d 310 Chapter 42 Configure 311 dat Gonngute NI etr 311 Chapter 43 TOUS CON cri A Y 313 43 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDS snae neant t tm a nha n kn c 313 AS A PCO
313. or clients communicating via the Switch Port Security This link takes you to a screen where you can activate MAC address learning and set the maximum number of MAC addresses to learn on a port Classifier This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to group packets based on the specified criteria Policy Rule This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to perform special treatment on the grouped packets Queuing Method This link takes you to a screen where you can configure queuing with associated queue weights for each port VLAN Stacking This link takes you to screens where you can activate and configure VLAN stacking Multicast This link takes you to screen where you can configure various multicast features IGMP snooping and create multicast VLANs AAA This link takes you to a screen where you can configure authentication authorization and accounting services via external servers The external servers can be either RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service or TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus IP Source Guard This link takes you to screens where you can configure filtering of unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network Loop Guard This link takes you to a screen where you can configure protection against network loops that occur on the edge of your network VLAN Mapping This link takes you to
314. or through the Switch s management port XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2 Goto Basic Setting gt Switch Setup and set the VLAN type to 802 1Q Click Apply to save the settings to the run time memory a ENTE VLAN Type Bridge Control Protocol Transparency Smart Isolation MAC Address Learning GARP Timer Priority Queue Assignment Port Based Active Active Aging Time Join Timer Leave Timer Leave All Timer Level Level6 Level5 Level4 Level3 Level2 Level1 Level o 200 1600 110000 7 w nm seconds milliseconds milliseconds milliseconds 3 Click Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN 4 Inthe Static VLAN screen select ACTIVE enter a descriptive name VLAN 200 for example in the Name field and enter 200 in the VLAN Group ID field 5 Select Fixed to configure ports 1 2 3 and 10 to be permanent members of this VLAN 6 Clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending frames out of these ports XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 7 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off Asso XE NP ACTIVE Name LAN Group ID VLAN Type ciation VLAN List hia NN O Private _ VLAN Status Port Control Tagging Normal v Tx Taagin 1 O Normal O Fix
315. ording Commands type of event Privilege This field is only configurable for Commands type of event Select the threshold command privilege level for which the Switch should send accounting information The Switch will send accounting information when commands at the level you specify and higher are executed on the Switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 23 2 4 Vendor Specific Attribute RFC 2865 standard specifies a method for sending vendor specific information between a RADIUS server and a network access device for example the Switch A company can create Vendor Specific Attributes VSAs to expand the functionality of a RADIUS server The Switch supports VSAs that allow you to perform the following actions based on user authentication Limit bandwidth on incoming or outgoing traffic for the port the user connects to Assign account privilege levels See the CLI Reference Guide for more information on account privilege levels for the authenticated user The VSAs are composed of the following Vendor ID An identification number assigned to the company by the IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority ZyXEL s vendor ID
316. ore sending them across the service provider s network to other edge switches Figure 128 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Network Scenario Service Provider s Network In the following example if you enable L2PT for STP you can have switches A B C and D in the same spanning tree even though switch A is not directly connected to switches B C and D Topology change information can be propagated throughout the service provider s network XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 27 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To emulate a point to point topology between two customer switches at different sites such as A and B you can enable protocol tunneling on edge switches 1 and 2 for PAgP Port Aggregation Protocol LACP or UDLD UniDirectional Link Detection Figure 129 L2PT Network Example Sey Service Provider s Network 27 1 1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Mode Each port can have two layer 2 protocol tunneling modes Access and Tunnel The Access port is an ingress port on the service provider s edge device 1 or 2 in Figure 129 on page 229 and connected to a customer switch A or B Incoming layer 2 protocol packets received on an access port are encapsulated and forwarded to the tunnel ports The Tunnel port is an egress port at the edge of the service provider s network and connected to another service provider s switch Incoming encapsulated layer 2 protocol packets received on a tunnel port are decapsulated and sent to
317. ork traffic allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your Switch XS3900 48F User s Guide 172 Chapter 22 Multicast 22 1 4 IGMP Snooping and VLANs The Switch can perform IGMP snooping on up to 16 VLANs You can configure the Switch to automatically learn multicast group membership of any VLANs The Switch then performs IGMP snooping on the first 16 VLANs that send IGMP packets This is referred to as auto mode Alternatively you can specify the VLANs that IGMP snooping should be performed on This is referred to as fixed mode In fixed mode the Switch does not learn multicast group membership of any VLANs other than those explicitly added as an IGMP snooping VLAN 22 2 Multicast Status Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast to display the screen as shown This screen shows the multicast group information See Section 22 1 on page 172 for more information on multicasting Figure 89 Advanced Application gt Multicast Multicast Status Multicast Setting Index VID Port Multicast Group The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 67 Multicast Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the index number of the entry VID This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Port This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group Multicast Group This field displays IP multicast group addresses XS3900 48F User s Guide 173 Chap
318. ou can map to the 8 priority levels On the Switch traffic assigned to higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested Priority Level The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporates the 802 1p Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter Level 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Level 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Level 2 This is for spare bandwidth Level 1 This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Level 0 Typically used for best effort traffic Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring
319. panel to display the screen as shown Figure 132 Advanced Application gt sFlow Active A WwW NH tn e o oem sFlow Collector 10 32768 120 ge ENS RF PT Apply Cancel Sample rate poll interval Collector Address 32768 120 32768 120 32768 120 32768 120 32768 120 32768 120 32768 120 32768 120 32768 120 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 99 Advanced Application gt sFlow LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable the sFlow agent on the Switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Port This field displays the port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this to allow the Switch to monitor traffic on this port and generate and send sFlow datagram to the specified collector Sample rate Enter a number N from 256 to 65535 The Switch captures every one ou
320. pe This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen XS3900 48F User s Guide Configure Clone This chapter shows you how you can copy the settings of one port onto other ports 42 1 Configure Clone Cloning allows you to copy the basic and advanced settings from a source port to a destination port or ports Click Management gt Configure Clone to open the following screen Figure 194 Management gt Configure Clone Configure Clone g Source Destination Port Port Features Active Name Basic Setting Speed Duplex BPDU Control Flow Control VLAN 1q VLAN 1q Member Bandwidth Control VLAN Stacking Port Security Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Port Authentication Queuing Method IGMP Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Protocol based VLAN Port based VLAN MAC Authentication F Two rate three color marker Ethernet OAM F Loop Guard ARP Inspection F DHCP Snooping MOS Pa I Advanced Application XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 42 Configure Clone The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 151 Management gt Configure Clone LABEL DESCRIPTION Source Enter the source port under the Source label This port s attributes are copied Destination Enter the destination port or ports under the Destination label These are
321. pears Figure 71 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication Port Authentication 802 1x MAC Authentication Click here Click here XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication 16 2 1 Activate IEEE 802 1x Security Use this screen to activate IEEE 802 1x security In the Port Authentication screen click 802 1x to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 72 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x A 802 1x J Port Authentication Guest Vlan Port Active Max Req Reauth Pe oe ia stan ere On 1 2 On 3600 60 30 30 2 2 On v 3600 e fo 30 3 2 On 3600 60 30 30 4 2 On 3600 60 30 30 5 2 On 3600 60 30 30 6 2 On 3600 60 30 30 7 2 On 3600 60 30 30 8 2 On 3600 60 30 30 9 2 On 3600 60 30 30 10 2 On v 3600 60 30 30 ae AIV I I m B CNN Eccl nv 30 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 49 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit 802 1x authentication on the Switch Note You must first enable 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Port This field displays a port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports U
322. physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link However the more ports you aggregate then the fewer available ports you have A trunk group is one logical link containing multiple ports The beginning port of each trunk group must be physically connected to form a trunk group The Switch supports both static and dynamic link aggregation Note In a properly planned network it is recommended to implement static link aggregation only This ensures increased network stability and control over the trunk groups on your Switch See Section 15 6 on page 138 for a static port trunking example 15 2 Dynamic Link Aggregation The Switch adheres to the IEEE 802 3ad standard for static and dynamic LACP port trunking The Switch supports the link aggregation IEEE802 3ad standard This standard describes the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP which is a protocol that dynamically creates and manages trunk groups When you enable LACP link aggregation on a port the port can automatically negotiate with the ports at the remote end of a link to establish trunk groups LACP also allows port redundancy that is if an operational port fails then one of the standby ports become operational without user intervention Please note that You must connect all ports point to p
323. plication types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going 33 1 1 DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service ToS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels and the remaining 2 bits are defined as currently unused CU The following figure illustrates the DS field Figure 146 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field DSCP 6 bits CU 2 bits DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping The DSCP value determines the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets as it is forwarded across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies 33 1 2 DiffServ Network Example The following figure depicts a DiffSer
324. port Untrusted Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches and the Switch discards DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers and the Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted ports in the following situations The packet is a DHCP server packet for example OFFER ACK or NACK The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the current bindings The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet and the source MAC address and source port do not match any of the current bindings The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high Rate pps Specify the maximum number for DHCP packets 1 2048 that the Switch receives from each port each second The Switch discards any additional DHCP packets Enter 0 to disable this limit which is recommended for trusted ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 24 5 2 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN and to specify whether or not the Switch adds DHCP relay agent option 82
325. port is not connected to any device State If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port See Section 11 1 3 on page 108 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDI NG if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP LACP This fields displays whether LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled on the port TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the transmission speed of data sent on this port in kilobytes per second Rx KB s This field shows the transmission speed of data received on this port in kilobytes per second Up Time This field shows the total amount of time in hours minutes and seconds the port has been up Clear Counter Type a port number select Port and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded statistical information for that port or select Any to clear statistics for all ports 5 2 1 Status Port Details Click a number in the Port column in the Status screen to display individual port statistics Use this screen to check status and detailed performance data about an individual port on the Switch XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 5 System Status and Port Statistics Figure 21 Status Port Details Port Info TX Packet RX
326. pter 20 ETE iiie PR 162 SANE MICE paio DI MP cr OS 162 nINEE u II s PRATER 162 e 12 Welghied Far USD ded acc oe RP p a RD errr dr a ab ee Tt E eade 162 20 1 3 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR i ice eceute a o tna Rak 163 20 2 OG e pr USU et n 163 Chapter 21 VLAN E 165 ELT VLAN IN CUBES A A dou EA a Rd M UND DC 165 2L 1 3 YLAN Storia Example nadaa 165 Zl LAN SIEUT OE ONS ossi itat O 166 iB E Eo NW Ip d t cr 167 APRO due M 167 21 45 Donmigarreg VAN SS sia ien pacers habits boc pta ia 168 ers Porsbagsdg EIE niniin nE ON 169 vip seco i c le e 170 Chapter 22 MUNCA S 172 229 KUC COVEN rn TERT 172 2211 IP Feci Adare SSES siria 172 XS3900 48F User s Guide 9 Table of Contents Gee Va I sachs seston brin A oppo sd aa bd bap el a ana cp N o ld d 172 22 Wege eines MN E odas 172 22 MIP onpoping and VLANS a an 173 cero haesit SS A HP A eM rtr A rie sai Gan AA 173 22 NU ec uro Lee 174 SEA OMP SOON VLAN PR 177 EERE IB FIN PEODIB euaduscanbassisidisn dxoD E A A dac sx Fuse A oda ta dac Da 178 Pr Ga 48 o v oc em T 179 ce b Tupes sr NIV POS a a 180 Ro BE ME MOdes usas uc qb IU ctp p tenu dite po 180 22 0 HOW MYR WOKS Re 9 180 22 7 Ge
327. r Switch PFC Priority based Flow Control IEEE 802 1Qbb 2011 is a flow control mechanism that uses a PAUSE frame to suspend traffic of a certain priority rather than drop it when there is network congestion lossless If an outgoing egress port buffer is almost full the Switch transmits a PAUSE frame to the sender who just transmitted traffic requesting it to stop sending traffic of a certain priority to that port For example say outgoing port 8 is receiving too much traffic of priorities 3 6 from port 1 Then if port 1 is configured with PFC priorities 3 6 port 1 can request the sender to suspend traffic with priorities 3 6 Similarly if the outcoming egress port 8 receives a PAUSE frame with PFC priorities 0 1 then if port 8 is configured with PFC it can suspend sending traffic with PFC priorities 0 1 ETS Enhanced Transmission Selection IEEE 802 1Qaz 2011 is used to allocate bandwidth for different traffic classes based on IEEE802 1p priority 0 to 7 allowing for eight types of traffic with a guaranteed minimum bandwidth Application priority is used to globally assign a priority to all FCoE traffic on the Switch DCBX Data Center Bridging capability eXchange IEEE 802 1Qaz 2011 uses LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol to advertize PFC ETS and application priority information between switches PFC information should be consistent between connected switches so PFC can be configured automatically using DCBX 1 2 2
328. r by a pound key semi colon period comma forward slash or space An Agent Circuit ID Sub option example is Switch 07 0123 and indicates the PPPoE packets come from a PPPoE client which is connected to the Switch s port 7 and belong to VLAN 123 Table 104 PPPoE IA Circuit ID Sub option Format Using Identifier String and Variables SubOpt Length Value Identifier String delimiter Slot ID delimiter Port No 53 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1byte 2 byte 29 1 2 2 WT 101 Default Circuit ID Syntax delimiter VLAN ID 1 byte 4 bytes If you do not configure a Circuit ID string for a specific VLAN on a port or for a specific port and disable the flexible Circuit ID syntax in the PPPoE Intermediate Agent screen the Switch automatically generates a Circuit ID string according to the default Circuit ID syntax which is defined in the DSL Forum Working Text WT 101 The default access node identifier is the host name of the PPPoE intermediate agent and the eth indicates Ethernet Table 105 PPPoE IA Circuit ID Sub option Format Defined in WT 101 SubOpt Length Value Access Space eth Space SlotID Port No VLAN ID Node Identifier 1 3 1 1 1 2 byte 1 4 byte byte byte byte byte byte bytes 20 byte 29 1 3 Port State Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for the PPPoE intermediate agen
329. r to RFC 3046 for more details The DHCP Relay Agent Information feature adds an Agent Information field to the Option 82 field The Option 82 field is in the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames that the Switch relays to a DHCP server Relay Agent Information can include the System Name of the Switch if you select this option You can change the System Name in Basic Settings gt General Setup The following describes the DHCP relay information that the Switch sends to the DHCP server Table 122 Relay Agent Information FIELD LABELS DESCRIPTION Slot ID 1 byte This value is always O for stand alone switches Port ID 1 byte This is the port that the DHCP client is connected to VLAN ID 2 bytes This is the VLAN that the port belongs to up to 64 bytes This optional read only field is set according to system name set in Basic Settings General Setup Information XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 34 DHCP 34 3 2 Configuring DHCP Global Relay Configure global DHCP relay in the DHCP Relay screen Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel and click the Global link to display the screen as shown Figure 154 IP Application gt DHCP gt Global LE DHCP Relay g Status Active O Remote DHCP Server 1 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information Option 82 Information r1 Apply Cancel The following table describes
330. raffic distribution algorithm 134 traffic distribution type 136 lockout 59 log 296 login 53 password 58 login account Administrator 285 non administrator 286 login accounts 285 configuring via web configurator 285 multiple 285 number of 285 login password 286 loop guard 220 how it works 221 port shut down 222 probe packet 221 loop guard vs STP 220 MAC Media Access Control 71 MAC address 71 309 maximum number per port 149 150 MAC address learning 74 90 92 99 149 specify limit 149 MAC authentication 141 aging time 147 MAC filter and ARP inspection 203 MAC freeze 149 MAC table 306 how it works 306 viewing 307 maintanence configuration backup 272 firmware 271 restoring configuration 272 maintenance 269 current configuration 269 main screen 269 Management Information Base MIB 277 management port 98 managing the device good habits 24 using FTP See FTP using SNMP See SNMP using Telnet See command interface using the command interface See command interface using the web configurator See web configurator man in the middle attacks 203 max age 120 hops 120 MIB and SNMP 277 supported MIBs 278 MIB Management Information Base 277 mirroring ports 130 monitor port 130 MSA MultiSource Agreement 50 XS3900 48F User s Guide Index MST Instance See MSTI 111 MST region 110 MSTI 111 MSTID 111 MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance 109 MSTP 107 109 bridge ID 123 124 configuratio
331. re admitted to the network The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR CIR and PIR values are based on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service provider and client Two Rate Three Color Marker evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels High packet loss priority level is referred to as red medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green After TRTCM is configured and DiffServ is enabled the following actions are performed on the colored packets Red high loss priority level packets are dropped Yellow medium loss priority level packets are dropped if there is congestion on the network Green low loss priority level packets are forwarded TRTCM operates in one of two modes color blind or color aware In color blind mode packets are marked based on evaluating against the PIR and CIR regardless of if they have previously been marked or not In the color aware mode packets are marked based on both existing color and evaluation against the PIR and CIR If the packets do not match any of colors then the packets proceed unchanged XS3900 48F User s Guide 257 Chapter 33 Differentiated Services 33 2 1 TRTCM Color blind Mode All packets are evaluated against the PIR If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red Otherwise it is evaluated against the CIR If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow Fi
332. re 12 Opening the Transceiver s Latch Example 2 Pull the transceiver out of the slot Figure 13 Transceiver Removal Example 3 2 Rear Panel The following figures show the rear panel of the Switch The rear panels contain Two slots for fan modules A Two slots for power modules with power receptacles B Figure 14 Rear Panel Jp CS COD aD CID apc aD iD ES DODOQOODO ooo0000G JOC a og 3 2 1 Power Connection Make sure you are using the correct power source and that no objects obstruct the airflow of the fans in both fan and power modules The Switch uses two power supply modules one of which is redundant so if one power module fails the system can operate on the remaining module The power connections are on the front of each power module Use the following procedure to connect the Switch to a power source after you have installed it in a rack XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 3 Switch Hardware Overview 1 Connect the female end of the power cord to the module power socket 2 Connect the other end of the cord to a power outlet The power modules can be disconnected from the power source individually Use the following procedure to disconnect the Switch from a power source 1 Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet 2 Disconnect the power cord from the module power socket 3 3 Switch LEDs The following table describes the Switch LEDs T
333. re button next to Load Factory Default to clear all Switch configuration information you configured and return to the factory defaults 2 Click OK to reset all Switch configurations to the factory defaults Figure 161 Load Factory Default Start Microsoft Internet Explorer 2 Are you sure you want to load factory default 3 In the web configurator click the Save button to make the changes take effect If you want to access the Switch web configurator again you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default Switch IP address 192 168 1 1 35 3 Save Configuration Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings permanently to configuration one on the Switch Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to configuration two on the Switch Alternatively click Save on the top right hand corner in any screen to save the configuration changes to the current configuration Note Clicking the Apply or Add button does NOT save the changes permanently All unsaved changes are erased after you reboot the Switch 35 4 Reboot System Reboot System allows you to restart the Switch without physically turning the power off It also allows you to load configuration one Config 1 or configuration two Config 2 when you reboot Follow the steps below to reboot the Switch 270 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 35 Maintenance 1 Inthe Maintenance screen click the
334. rned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide SFlow This chapter shows you how to configure sFlow to have the Switch monitor traffic in a network and send information to an sFlow collector for analysis 28 1 sFlow Overview sFlow RFC 3176 is a standard technology for monitoring switched networks An sFlow agent embedded on a switch or router gets sample data and packet statistics from traffic forwarded through its ports The sFlow agent then creates sFlow data and sends it to an sFlow collector The sFlow collector is a server that collects and analyzes sFlow datagram An sFlow datagram includes packet header input and output interface sampling process parameters and forwarding information sFlow minimizes impact on CPU load of the Switch as it analyzes sample data only sFlow can continuously monitor network traffic and create reports for network performance analysis and troubleshooting For example you can use it to know which IP address or which type of traffic caused network congestion Figure 131 sFlow Application sFlow Agent gt E E N Se E sFlow Collector XS3900 48F User s Guide 232 Chapter 28 sFlow 28 2 sFlow Port Configuration Click Advanced Application gt sFlow in the navigation
335. rocessed Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Learning All BPDUs are received and processed Information frames are submitted to the learning process but not forwarded Forwarding All BPDUs are received and processed All information frames are received and forwarded 11 1 4 Multiple RSTP MRSTP Multiple RSTP is ZyXEL s proprietary feature that is compatible with RSTP and STP With MRSTP you can have more than one spanning tree on your Switch and assign port s to each tree Each spanning tree operates independently with its own bridge information XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol In the following example there are two RSTP instances MRSTP 1 and MRSTP2 on switch A Figure 47 MRSTP Network Example To set up MRSTP activate MRSTP on the Switch and specify which port s belong to which spanning tree Note Each port can belong to one STP tree only 11 1 5 Multiple STP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s is backwards compatible with STP RSTP and addresses the limitations of existing spanning tree protocols STP and RSTP in networks to include the following features One Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST that represents the entire network s connectivity Grouping of multiple bridges or switching devices into regions that appear as one single bridge on the network A VLAN can be mapped to a specific Multiple Spanning Tree Instance
336. root port is selected from among the switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to activate RSTP on this port Edge Select this check box to configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a computer An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forwarding state immediately without going through listening and learning states right after the port is configured as an edge port or when its link status changes Note An edge port becomes a non edge port as soon as it receives
337. rt Commit Rate Specify the Commit Information Rate CIR for this port Peak Rate Specify the Peak Information Rate PIR for this port XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 33 Differentiated Services Table 118 P Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker continued LABEL DESCRIPTION DSCP Use this section to specify the DSCP values that you want to assign to packets based on the color they are marked via TRTCM green Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with low packet loss priority yellow Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with medium packet loss priority red Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with high packet loss priority Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 33 4 DSCP to IEEE 802 1p Priority Settings You can configure the DSCP to IEEE 802 1p mapping to allow the Switch to prioritize all traffic based on the incoming DSCP value according to the DiffServ to IEEE 802 1p mapping table The following table shows the default DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping Table 119 Default DSCP IEEE 802 1p Mapping DSCP VALUE 0 7 8 15 16 23 24 31 32 39 40 47 48 5
338. rt number the Switch uses to send sFlow datagram to the collector Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide PPPoE This chapter describes how the Switch gives a PPPoE termination server additional information that the server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPoE client 29 1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Overview A PPPoE Intermediate Agent PPPoE IA is deployed between a PPPoE server and PPPoE clients It helps the PPPoE server identify and authenticate clients by adding subscriber line specific information to PPPoE discovery packets from clients on a per port or per port per VLAN basis before forwarding them to the PPPoE server i PPPoE Server PPPoE Client PPPoE IA 29 1 1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Tag Format If the PPPoE Intermediate Agent is enabled the Switch adds a vendor specific tag to PADI PPPoE Active Discovery Initialization and PADR PPPoE Active Discovery Request packets from PPPoE clients This tag is defined in RFC 2516 and has the following format for this feature Table 101 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Vendor specific Tag Format The Tag_ Type is 0x0105 for vendor specific tags as defined in RFC 2516 The Tag_Len indicates the length of Value i1 and i2 The Value is the 32 bit number 0x00000DE9 which stands for the ADSL Forum IANA entry i1 an
339. rts that have Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP MRSTP or MSTP enabled Figure 124 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard Port On winie EN E Loop Guard Active CT ips mettent eter y apr c RP utc A scie allel Apply Cancel Active 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 o0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 95 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable loop guard on the Switch The Switch generates syslog internal log messages as well as SNMP traps when it shuts down a port via the loop guard feature Port This field displays a port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the loop guard feature on this port The Switch sends probe packets from this port to check if the Switch it is connected to is in loop state If the Switch that this port is connected is in loop state the Switch will shut down this port Clear this check box to disable the loop guard feature XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 25 Loop Guard Table 95 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these chang
340. ry default configuration file or reset the Switch back to the factory defaults 4 6 1 Reload the Configuration File Uploading the factory default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600bps with 8 data bit no parity one stop XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator bit and flow control set to none The password will also be reset to 1234 and the IP address to 192 168 1 1 To upload the configuration file do the following 1 Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software See Section 3 2 on page 51 for details 2 Disconnect and reconnect the Switch s power to begin a session When you reconnect the Switch s power you will see the initial screen 3 When you see the message Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds press any key to enter debug mode 4 Type atic after the Enter Debug Mode message 5 Wait for the Starting XMODEM upload message before activating XMODEM upload on your terminal 6 After a configuration file upload type atgo to restart the Switch Figure 18 Resetting the Switch Via the Console Port Bootbase Version V1 00 01 13 2011 19 34 13 RAM Size 524288 Kbytes ZyNOS Version V4 00 BVG 0 b6 01 28 2011 14 44 24 Press any
341. s Parameters This field displays the active classifier s you configure in the Classifier screen Select the classifier s to which this policy rule applies To select more than one classifier press SHIFT and select the choices at the same time Set the fields below for this policy You only have to set the field s that is related to the action s you configure in the Action field General Egress Port Type the number of an outgoing port Specify the action Priority Specify a priority level DSCP Specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 TOS Specify the type of service TOS priority level Metering You can configure the desired bandwidth available to a traffic flow Traffic that exceeds the maximum bandwidth allocated in cases where the network is congested is called out of profile traffic Bandwidth Specify the bandwidth in kilobit per second Kbps Enter a number between 1 and 1000000 Out of Specify a new DSCP number between 0 and 63 if you want to replace or remark the Profile DSCP DSCP number for out of profile traffic Action s the Switch takes on the associated classified traffic flow Forwarding Select No change to forward the packets Select Discard the packet to drop the packets Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to retain the frames that were marked to be dropped before Priority Select No cha
342. s Kbps Kbps Kbps Kbps Kbps A gt o I TT WAN A gt o I Kbps Kbps A gt o D TT Kbps Kbps A gt J O Kbps Kbps TTT TTT Cancel i i Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 118 P Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to activate TRTCM Two Rate Three Color Marker on the Switch The Switch evaluates and marks the packets based on the TRTCM settings Note You must also activate DiffServ on the Switch and the individual ports for the Switch to drop red high loss priority colored packets Mode Select color blind to have the Switch treat all incoming packets as uncolored All incoming packets are evaluated against the CIR and PIR Select color aware to treat the packets as marked by some preceding entity Incoming packets are evaluated based on their existing color Incoming packets that are not marked proceed through the Switch Port This field displays the index number of a port on the Switch Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this to activate TRTCM on the po
343. s port with VLAN stacking tags Anything you configure in SPVI D and Priority of the Port based QinQ or the Selective QinQ screen are ignored Select Access Port to have the Switch add the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames received on this port Select Access Port for ingress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Select Tunnel Port available for Gigabit ports only for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Select Tunnel Port to have the Switch add the Tunnel TPI D tag to all outgoing frames sent on this port In order to support VLAN stacking on a port the port must be able to allow frames of 1526 Bytes 1522 Bytes 4 Bytes for the second tag to pass through it XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking Table 64 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Tunnel TPID is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates whether the frame TPID carries IEEE 802 1Q tag information Enter a four digit hexadecimal number from 0000 to FFFF that the Switch adds in the outer VLAN tag of the frames sent on the tunnel port s The Switch also uses this to check if the received frames are double tagged The value of this field is 0x8100 as defined in IEEE 802 1Q If the Switch needs to communicate with other vendors devices they should use the same TPID Note You can define up to four different tunnel TPIDs including 8100 in this screen at a
344. s screen to configure rules to forward specific multicast frames such as streaming or control frames to specific port s XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 9 Static Multicast Forward Setup Click Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 45 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding Static Multicast Forwarding ng Active m Name MAC Address o o VID o Port 1 Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this check box Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for this static multicast MAC address forwarding rule This is for identification only MAC Address Enter a multicast MAC address which identifies the multicast group The last binary bit of the first octet pair in a multicast MAC address must be 1 For example the first octet pair 00000001 is 01 and 00000011 is 03 in hexadecimal so 01 00 5e 00 00 0A and 03 00 5e 00 00 27 are valid multicast MAC addresses VID You can forward frames with matching destination MAC address to port s within a VLAN group Enter t
345. s section to configure MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance settings Instance Enter the number you want to use to identify this MST instance on the Switch The Switch supports instance numbers 0 16 Bridge Priority Set the priority of the Switch for the specific spanning tree instance The lower the number the more likely the Switch will be chosen as the root bridge within the spanning tree instance Enter priority values between 0 and 61440 in increments of 4096 thus valid values are 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 and 61440 VLAN Range Enter the start of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the Start field Enter the end of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the End field Next click Add to add this range of VLAN s to be mapped to the MST instance Remove to remove this range of VLAN s from being mapped to the MST instance Clear to remove all VLAN s from being mapped to this MST instance XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 38 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Enabled VLAN s This field displays which VLAN s are mapped to this MST instance Port This field displays the port number i Settings in
346. s when policy is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the name you have assigned to this policy Classifier s This field displays the name s of the classifier to which this policy applies Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 19 Policy Rule 19 4 Policy Example The figure below shows an example Policy screen where you configure a policy to limit bandwidth and discard out of profile traffic on a traffic flow classified using the Example classifier refer to Section 18 4 on page 156 Figure 83 Policy Example Active Test Name Classifier s General Egress Port 1 Parameters E Priority DSCP TOS Forwarding No change Discard the packet Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Priority No change O Setthe packets 802 1p priority O Send the packet to priority queue Replace the 802 1p priority field with the IP TOS value Diffserv No change Setthe packet s TOS field Replace the IP TOS field with the 802 1p priority value O Set the Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Outgoing Action C Send the packet to the mirror port E Send the packet to the egress port Metering O Enable Drop the packet CI Change the DSCP value C Set Out Drop Precedence O
347. screen to display the screen as shown Use this screen to enable and edit the VLAN mapping rule s Figure 127 VLAN Mapping Configuration Active Name Port VID Priority Index Active C VLAN Mapping Configure 1 Translated VID Name Port VID VLAN Mappin I Add Cancel Translated VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 97 VLAN Mapping Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this rule Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Port Type a port to be included in this rule VID Enter a VLAN ID from 1 to 4094 This is the VLAN tag carried in the packets and will be translated into the VID you specified in the Translated VID field Translated VID Enter a VLAN ID from 1 to 4094 into which the customer VID carried in the packets will be translated Priority Select a priority level from 0 to 7 This is the priority level that replaces the customer priority level in the tagged packets or adds to the untagged packets Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done conf
348. screens where you can configure VLAN mapping settings on the Switch Layer 2 Protocol This link takes you to a screen where you can configure L2PT Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Tunneling settings on the Switch sFlow This link takes you to screens where you can configure sFlow settings on the Switch PPPoE This link takes you to screens where you can configure how the Switch gives a PPPoE termination server additional subscriber information that the server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPoE client Errdisable This link takes you to a screen where you can configure CPU protection and error disable recovery Private VLAN This link takes you to screens where you can configure private VLAN port mapping IP Application Static Route This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static routes A static route defines how the Switch should forward traffic by configuring the TCP IP parameters manually XS3900 48F User s Guide 57 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 10 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION DiffServ This link takes you to screens where you can enable DiffServ configure marking rules and set DSCP to IEEE802 1p mappings DHCP This link takes you to screens where you can configure the DHCP settings Management Maintenance This link takes you to screens where you can perform firmware and configuration file maintenance as we
349. se this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this checkbox to permit 802 1x authentication on this port You must first allow 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Max Req Specify the number of times the Switch tries to authenticate client s before sending unresponsive ports to the Guest VLAN This is set to 2 by default That is the Switch attempts to authenticate a client twice If the client does not respond to the first authentication request the Switch tries again If the client still does not respond to the second request the Switch sends the client to the Guest VLAN The client needs to send a new request to be authenticated by the Switch again XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication Table 49 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Reauth Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port Reauth period Specify the length of time required to pass before a client has to re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port Quiet period Specify the number of seconds the port remains in the HELD state and rejects further authentication requests from the connected cli
350. sends 5 syslog messages every 2 seconds Log interval Apply Type how often 1 86400 seconds the Switch sends a batch of syslog messages to the syslog server Enter 0 if you want the Switch to send syslog messages immediately See Syslog rate for an example of the relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 24 7 1 ARP Inspection Port Configure Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for ARP inspection You can also specify the maximum rate at which the Switch receives ARP packets on each untrusted port To XS3900 48F User s Guide 217 Chapter 24 IP Source Guard open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt Port Figure 118 ARP Inspection Port Configure E ARP Inspection Port Configure ed Configure Limit Port Trusted State E Rate pps Burst interval seconds Unused TL mmsedm 5 Dp 1 1 2 Unused 5 mp 1 11 s mmsedm ps5 np mmsedg 5 p 1 5 Unused fs mp 1 s mmseds ps 5 p 1 o A 8 Untrusted y gt a Wc ee i ae as
351. sends to that SNMP manager Type Select the categories of SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP manager Options Select the individual SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP station See Section 36 3 3 on page 278 for individual trap descriptions The traps are grouped by category Selecting a category automatically selects all of the category s traps Clear the check boxes for individual traps that you do not want the Switch to send to the SNMP station Clearing a category s check box automatically clears all of the category s trap check boxes the Switch only sends traps from selected categories XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control Table 136 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 36 3 6 Configuring SNMP User From the SNMP screen click User to view the screen as shown Use the User screen to create SNMP users for authentication with managers using SNMP v3 and associate them to SNMP groups An SNMP user is an SNMP manager Figure 170 Management gt Access Control gt
352. shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the transmission speed of data sent on this port in kilobytes per second XS3900 48F User s Guide 67 Chapter 5 System Status and Port Statistics Table 12 Status gt Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Rx KB s This field shows the transmission speed of data received on this port in kilobytes per second Up Time This field shows the total amount of time the connection has been up Tx Packet The following fields display detailed information about frames transmitted Unicast This field shows the number of good unicast frames transmitted Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast frames transmitted Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast frames transmitted Pause Pause is a flow control mechanism that notifies the sender to slow transmission if the receiver s buffers are almost full This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause frames transmitted Priority You may use commands to request which Pause frames are stopped according to priority 0 Pause to 7 For example you may request the sender to stop Pause frames with priority equal to 3 and 4 This field shows the number of 802 1Qbb Pause frames transmitted Tagged This field shows the number of frames with VLAN tags transmitted Rx Packet The following fields display detailed information about frames rec
353. slash or space XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 29 PPPoE Table 106 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 29 3 1 PPPoE IA Per Port Use this screen to specify whether individual ports are trusted or untrusted ports and have the Switch add extra information to PPPoE discovery packets from PPPoE clients on a per port basis Note The Switch will drop all PPPoE packets if you enable the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on the Switch and there are no trusted ports Click the Port link in the Intermediate Agent screen to display the screen as shown Figure 136 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port dq IIE VLAN Intermediate Agent Port Server Trusted State Circuit id Remote id Untrusted 1 Untrusted 2 Untrusted 3 Untrusted 4 Untrusted 5 Untrusted 6 Untrusted 7 Untrusted 8 Untrusted 9 Untrusted 10 Untrusted M luna Mec ERE LL a cil i t n 9Q The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 1
354. st BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Maximum hops Enter the number of hops between 1 and 255 in an MSTP region before the BPDU is discarded and the port information is aged Configuration Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 characters of an MST region Revision Number Enter a number to identify a region s configuration Devices must have the same revision number to belong to the same region Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Instance Use thi
355. st Visited Getting Started 5 Latest Headlines Jl https 192 168 0 1 Ly SB Googe p a Web Configurator In Save Status El Logout HB Help Application State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors TxKB s RxKB s Up Time R 5 1 Down STOP Disabled 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 P GBplicsdon 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 1 3 Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 7 4 Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 B Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 ra Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 9 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 11 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 12 100M F FORWARDING Disabled 84724 285753 0 0 0 0 442 6 03 46 13 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 14 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 15 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 18 Down STOP Disabled 289322 88392 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 17 Down STOP Disabled D D 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 18 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Iv O Any A O Port 995 2011 by ZyXEL Communica nsu 9 36 5 3 Configuring Service Port Access Control Service Access Control allows you to decide what services you may use to access the Switch You may also change the default service port and configure trusted computer s for each service in the Remote Management screen discussed later Click Ac
356. st be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another Table 145 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications Maximum number of cluster 24 members Cluster Member Models Cluster member models must be compatible with ZyXEL cluster management implementation Cluster Manager The cluster manager is the Switch through which you manage the cluster member switches Cluster Members Cluster members are the switches being managed by the cluster manager switch XS3900 48F User s Guide 300 Chapter 39 Cluster Management In the following example switch A in the basement is the cluster manager and the other switches on the upper floors of the building are cluster members Figure 186 Clustering Application Example u Panama 39 2 Cluster Management Status Click Management gt Cluster Management in the navigation panel to display the following screen Note A cluster can only have one manager Figure 187 Management gt Cluster Management Configuration Status Manager Manager 00 13 49 01 1fb0 The Number Of Member 1 Index MacAddr Name Model Status 1 00 13 49 ae b 7a ES 2024PWR ES 2024PWR Online XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 39 Cluster Management The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 146 Management gt Cluster Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This fiel
357. static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen The Switch uses the MAC Table to determine how to forward frames See the following figure The Switch examines a received frame and learns the port from which this source MAC address came The Switch checks to see if the frame s destination MAC address matches a source MAC address already learned in the MAC Table f the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address then it forwards the frame to that port e f the Switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address then the frame is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestion f the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the frame Figure 191 MAC Table Flowchart Is destination MAC address in the MAC Table Yes Forward to all ports Is the outgoing port different from the incoming port Filter this Forward to frame outgoing port XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 40 MAC Table 40 2 Viewing the MAC Table Click Management gt MAC Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen Use this screen to search specific MAC addresses You can also directly add dynamic MAC address es into the static MAC forwarding table or MAC filtering table from the MAC table using this screen Figure 192 Management gt MAC Table
358. stream frame is received on a port configured for a protocol based VLAN the Switch checks if a tag is added already and its protocol The untagged packets of the same protocol are then placed in the same protocol based VLAN One advantage of using protocol based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to traffic of the same protocol Note Protocol based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 7 VLAN For example ports 1 2 3 and 4 belong to static VLAN 100 and ports 4 5 6 7 belong to static VLAN 120 You can configure a protocol based VLAN A with priority 2 for ARP traffic received on port 1 2 and 3 You can also have a protocol based VLAN B with priority 3 for Apple Talk traffic received on port 6 and 7 All upstream ARP traffic from port 1 2 and 3 will be grouped together and all upstream Apple Talk traffic from port 6 and 7 will be in another group and have higher priority than ARP traffic when they go through the uplink port to a backbone switch C Figure 35 Protocol Based VLAN Application Example 7 5 6 1 Configuring Protocol Based VLAN Click Protocol Based VLAN in the VLAN Port Setting screen to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 36 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN L NN Vian Port Setting Active El Port Name e IP X Ethernet type Others Hex VID Priori
359. system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNI X environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution XS3900 48F User s Guide Appendix A Common Services XS3900 48F User s Guide Copyright Legal Information Copyright 2013 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL fur
360. t This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for DHCP snooping or ARP inspection You can also specify the agent sub options circuit ID and remote ID that the Switch adds to PADI and PADR packets from PPPoE clients XS3900 48F User s Guide 237 Chapter 29 PPPoE Trusted ports are connected to PPPoE servers f a PADO PPPoE Active Discovery Offer PADS PPPoE Active Discovery Session confirmation or PADT PPPoE Active Discovery Terminate packet is sent from a PPPoE server and received on a trusted port the Switch forwards it to all other ports f a PADI or PADR packet is sent from a PPPoE client but received on a trusted port the Switch forwards it to other trusted port s Note The Switch will drop all PPPoE discovery packets if you enable the PPPoE intermediate agent and there are no trusted ports Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers f a PADI PADR or PADT packet is sent from a PPPoE client and received on an untrusted port the Switch adds a vendor specific tag to the packet and then forwards it to the trusted port s The Switch discards PADO and PADS packets which are sent from a PPPoE server but received on an untrusted port 29 2 The PPPoE Screen Use this screen to configure the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on the Switch Click Advanced Application gt PPPoE in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Click Click Here to go to the Intermediate Agent screen
361. t ID you configure here has the highest priority Remote id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Remote ID sub option for this VLAN on the specified port Spaces are allowed If you do not specify a string here or in the Remote id field for a specific port the Switch automatically uses the PPPoE client s MAC address The Remote ID you configure here has the highest priority Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 29 PPPoE 29 3 3 PPPoE IA for VLAN Use this screen to set whether the PPPoE Intermediate Agent is enabled on a VLAN and whether the Switch appends the Circuit ID and or Remote ID to PPPoE discovery packets from a specific VLAN Click the VLAN link in the Intermediate Agent screen to display the screen as shown Figure 138 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt VLAN VID 123 124 125 126 127 128 AR ED Intermediate Agent Show VLAN Start VID End VID Apply Enabled Circuit id Remote id No No Yes No No No No EE SS HES HLS OOOOwW OO S S PES EE DEDI The followin
362. t VLAN Example ett gt VLAN 100 Internet Y E XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication Use this screen to enable and assign a guest VLAN to a port In the Port Authentication gt 802 1x screen click Guest Vlan to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 74 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x gt Guest VLAN A OFT ED 802 1x Port Active Guest Vian Host mode Multi Secure Num Multi Host m 1 1 Multi Host 1 2 1 Multi Host v 1 3 1 Multi Host w 1 4 1 Multi Host 1 5 1 Multi Host 1 6 1 Mult Host m 1 7 1 Multi Host v 1 8 1 Multi Host m 1 9 1 Mult Host 1 10 1 Multi Host 1 11 1 Multi Host v 1 12 1 Multi Host 1 13 1 Multi Host 1 14 Multi Ho Y 1 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 50 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x gt Guest VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays a port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this checkbox to enable the guest VLAN feat
363. t buttons to display different pages XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 7 VLAN 7 5 3 Configure a Static VLAN or Private VLAN Use this screen to create 802 1Q VLAN IDs and set VLAN members for Normal static or Private Primary Isolated or Community VLANs You must create VLAN IDs for Private Primary Isolated or Community VLANs before configuring Advanced Application Private VLAN See Section 7 1 on page 81 for more information on 802 1Q VLAN To configure a static or private VLAN click Static VLAN in the VLAN Status screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 31 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN Add Cancel Clear Delete Cancel a ECON VLAN Status ACTIVE Name VLAN Group ID VLAN Type Normal Private y Association VLAN List Port Control Tagging s Normal 4 Tx Tagging 1 9 Norma Fixed Forbidden 4 Tx Tagging 2 9 Norma Fixed Forbidden 4 Tx Tagging 3 9 Norma Fixed Forbidden 4 Tx Tagging 4 9 Norma Fixed Forbidden 4 Tx Tagging 5 9 Norma Fixed Forbidden 4 Tx Tagging 6 Norma Fixed Forbidden Y Tx Tagging 7 Norma Fixed Forbidden V Tx Tagging 8 9 Norma Fixed Forbidden Y Tx Tagging 9 Norma Fixed Forbidden V Tx Tagging CM WM av E M S N VID Active Name VLAN Type Association VLAN List Delete 1 Yes 1 Normal 50 Yes eg1 Private Primary 51 53 Private 51 Yes eg1 1 x 9 Community 52 Yes eg1 2 Private Isolated Private 53 Yes eg1 3 9 C
364. t of N packets for this port and creates sFlow datagram poll interval Specify a time interval from 20 to 120 in seconds the Switch waits before sending the sFlow datagram and packet counters for this port to the collector XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 28 sFlow Table 99 Advanced Application gt sFlow continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Collector Address Enter the IP address of the sFlow collector Note You must have the sFlow collector already configured in the sFlow gt Collector screen The sFlow collector does not need to be in the same subnet as the Switch but it must be accessible from the Switch Note Configure UDP port 6343 the default on a NAT router to allow port forwarding if the collector is behind a NAT router Configure a firewall rule for UDP port 6343 the default to allow incoming traffic if the collector is behind a firewall Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 28 2 1 sFlow Collector Configuration Click the Collector link in the sFlow screen to display the screen as shown You can configure up to four sFlow collectors in this screen You may want to configure more than one coll
365. t www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products Safety Warnings Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool XS3900 48F User s Guide Appendix B Legal Information Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information For continued protection against risk of fire replace only with same type and rating of fuse Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect it to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is
366. ta to a server or device that is not reachable through the default gateway for example when sending SNMP traps or using ping to test IP connectivity This figure shows a Telnet session coming in from network N1 The Switch sends reply traffic to default gateway R1 which routes it back to the manager s computer The Switch needs a static route to tell it to use router R2 to send traffic to an SNMP trap server on network N2 Figure 144 Static Routing Overview B 3 o P XS3900 48F User s Guide 253 Chapter 32 Static Route 32 2 Configuring Static Routing Click IP Application gt Static Routing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 145 IP Application gt Static Routing ED Static Routing d Active Name Destination IP Address r m ooo 5 T Yes IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 Metric Index Active Name Example Add Cancel Clear Gateway Address Metric Delete 192 168 1 2 2 r1 Destination Address Subnet Mask 172 21 1 1 255 255 0 0 Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels you use to create a static route Table 116 IP Application gt Static Routing LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Name Enter a descriptive name up to 10 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Destination IP This paramet
367. tch Click on the RADIUS Server Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as shown Figure 103 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup ED RADIUS Server Setup g AAA Authentication Server Mode index priority Timeout jo seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 1812 n 2 lo 0 0 0 1812 O Apply Cancel Accounting Server Timeout sn seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 1813 Dn 2 0 0 0 0 1813 Dr Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 74 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to configure your RADIUS authentication settings Server Mode This field only applies if you configure multiple RADIUS servers Select index priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured RADIUS server if the RADIUS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second RADIUS server Select round robin to alternate between the RADIUS servers that it sends authentication requests to Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request response from the RADIUS server If you are using two RADIUS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two RADIUS servers For example if you set the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a r
368. tch to a VLAN based on IEEE 802 1x authentication The port VLAN settings are fixed and untagged This will also set the port s VID The following table describes the values you need to configure Note that these attributes only work when you enable authorization see Section 23 2 3 on page 193 Table 78 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE VLAN Assignment Tunnel Type VLAN 13 Tunnel Medium Type 802 6 Tunnel Private Group ID VLAN ID Note You must also create a VLAN with the specified VID on the Switch Note The bolded values in this table are fixed values as defined in RFC 3580 23 3 Supported RADIUS Attributes Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS attributes are data used to define specific authentication and accounting elements in a user profile which is stored on the RADIUS server This section lists the RADIUS attributes supported by the Switch XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 23 AAA Refer to RFC 2865 for more information about RADIUS attributes used for authentication Refer to RFC 2866 and RFC 2869 for RADIUS attributes used for accounting This section lists the attributes used by authentication and accounting functions on the Switch In cases where the attribute has a specific format associated with it the format is specified 23 3 1 Attributes Used for Authentication The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RAD
369. ted VLANs They cannot communicate with ports in different primary VLANs Community Ports in a Community VLAN can communicate with promiscuous ports in an associated Primary VLAN and other community ports in the same Community VLAN They cannot communicate with ports in Isolated VLANs non associated Primary VLAN promiscuous ports nor community ports in different Community VLANs Isolated Ports in an Isolated VLAN can communicate with promiscuous ports in an associated Primary VLAN only They cannot communicate with other isolated ports in the same Isolated VLAN non associated Primary VLAN promiscuous ports nor any community ports Table 113 PVLAN Graphic Key LABEL DESCRIPTION P VLAN 100 Primary private VLAN XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 31 Private VLAN Table 113 PVLAN Graphic Key continued LABEL DESCRIPTION C VLAN 101 Community private VLAN I VLAN 102 Isolated private VLAN Tagged Private VLANs can span switches but trunking ports must be VLAN trunking ports see Advanced gt VLAN Status gt VLAN Port Setting ptem B L L LI E a C VLAN 101 I VLAN 102 C VLAN 101 I VLAN 102 P VLAN 100 P VLAN 100 Table 114 Spanning PVLAN Graphic Key LABEL DESCRIPTION UP Uplink promiscuous port TP VLAN trunking ports S1 S2 Switch 1 Switch 2 P VLAN 100 Primary private VLAN with VLAN ID tag of 100 C VLAN 101 Community private VLAN with
370. ter 22 Multicast 22 3 Multicast Setting Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting link to display the screen as shown See Section 22 1 on page 172 for more information on multicasting Figure 90 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting OMS Multicast Status IGMP Snooping VLAN IGMP Filtering Profile MVR Active O Querier O IGMP Snooping Host Timeout 260 802 1p Priority No Change IGMP Filtering Active O Unknown Multicast Frame e Flooding Cc Drop Reserved Multicast Group Flooding Drop Port immed Normal lee Fatime Group Max Group Throttling IGMP Filtering IGMP Querier Leave Limited Num Profile Mode 7 c ef cl m Lu Dey pez tuto y 1 C foo cfpo Fl fom pez Auc 2 C ef cko r ll bey Detz Ao s 3 C a0 c zoo r fo Deny Dez awe y 4 C e joo cko Mm ft Deny Default Auto s c epe cbo Tr ley E pz Am si e e Apply ul The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 68 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Snooping Use these settings to configure IGMP Snooping Active Select Active to enable IGMP Snooping to forward group multicast traffic only to ports that are members of that group Querier Select this option to allow the Switch to send IGMP General Query messages to the VLANs with the multicast hosts attached Host Timeout
371. that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 11 8 1 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Port Configuration To configure MSTP ports click Port in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP screen Figure 59 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP gt Port OMe MSTP Port Edge E O 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP gt Port LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Edge Select this check box to configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a computer An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forwarding state immediately without going through listening and learning states right after the port is configured as an edge port or when its link status changes Note An edge port becomes a non edge port as soon as it receives
372. the labels in this screen Table 123 P Application gt DHCP gt Global LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable DHCP relay Remote DHCP Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation Server 1 3 Relay Agent Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot number port Information number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup screen Select the check box for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 34 DHCP 34 3 3 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example The follow figure shows a network example where the Switch is used to relay DHCP requests for the VLAN1 and VLAN2 domains There is only one DHCP server that services the DHCP clients in both domains Figure 155 Global DHCP Relay Network Example bos DHCP Server B 7 192 168 1 100 Y 1111 5 D VLAN2 nE 3 Configure th
373. the source destination MAC address with the VLAN identification number to Address which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the VLAN group identification number Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox es in the Delete column XS3900 48F User s Guide Spanning Tree Protocol The Switch supports Spanning Tree Protocol STP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP as defined in the following standards EEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol EEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol EEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol The Switch also allows you to set up multiple STP configurations or trees Ports can then be assigned to the trees 11 1 STP RSTP Overview R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a Switch to interact with other R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network The Switch uses IEEE 802 1w RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol that allows faster convergence of the spanning tree than STP while also being backwards compatible with STP only aware bridges In RSTP topology change information is directly propagated throughout the network from the device that generates the topology change In STP
374. ther reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Certifications Class A CE Mark Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian I CES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASS 1 PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040 10 AND 1040 11 PRODUIT CONFORME SELON 21 CFR 1040 10 ET 1040 11 Viewing Certifications Go to http www zyxel com to view this product s documentation and certifications ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period the Warranty Period from the date of purchase The Warranty Period varies by region Check with your vendor and or the authorized
375. this option Normal The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login Transfer Type Transfer files in either ASCII plain text format or in binary mode Configuration and firmware files should be transferred in binary mode Initial Remote Specify the default remote directory path Directory Initial Local Directory Specify the default local directory path 35 8 4 FTP Restrictions FTP will not work when FTP service is disabled in the Service Access Control screen 274 XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 35 Maintenance The IP address es in the Remote Management screen does not match the client IP address If it does not match the Switch will disconnect the FTP session immediately XS3900 48F User s Guide 275 Access Control This chapter describes how to control access to the Switch 36 1 Access Control Overview A console port and FTP are allowed one session each Telnet and SSH share nine sessions up to five Web sessions five different usernames and passwords and or limitless SNMP access control sessions are allowed Table 128 Access Control Overview Console Port SSH Telnet FTP Web SNMP One session Share up to nine One session Up to five accounts No limit sessions A console port access control session and Telnet access control session cannot coexist when multi login is disabled See the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide for more infor
376. this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to add this port to the MST instance Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in the Switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 31 on page 107 for more information Add Click Add to save this MST instance to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this change if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Instance This field displays the ID of an MST instance VLAN This field displays the VID or VID ranges to which the MST instance is mapped Active Port This field display the ports configured to participate in the MST instance Delete Check the rule s
377. this site doesn t use trusted identification Add Exception XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control Confirm the HTTPS server URL matches Click Confirm Security Exception to proceed to the web configurator login screen Figure 179 Security Alert Mozilla Firefox Add Security Exception You are about to override how Firefox identifies this site A Legitimate banks stores and other public sites will not ask you to do this Server Location https 192 168 1 1 i Certificate Status This site attempts to identify itself with invalid information Wrong Site Certificate belongs to a different site which could indicate an identity theft Unknown Identity Certificate is not trusted because it hasn t been verified by a recognized authority EXAMPLE Permanently store this exception Confirm Security Exception Cancel 36 5 2 5 The Main Screen After you accept the certificate and enter the login username and password the Switch main screen appears The lock displayed in the bottom right of the browser status bar in Internet Explorer 6 or XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 36 Access Control Mozilla Firefox or next to the address bar in Internet Explorer 7 or 8 denotes a secure connection Figure 180 Example Lock Denoting a Secure Connection 2 Web Configurator Mozilla Firefox Elle Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help C C x o GE Mo
378. tion 82 Index back up configuration file 272 basic settings 70 basic setup tutorial 25 binding 200 binding table 200 building 200 BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units 108 Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs 108 C CDP 230 certifications notices 321 viewing 321 CFI Canonical Format Indicator 81 changing the password 58 Cisco Discovery Protocol see CDP CIST 111 CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree 109 Class of Service CoS 256 classifier 151 153 and QoS 151 editing 154 example 156 overview 151 setup 151 153 154 viewing 154 CLI Reference Guide 2 cloning a port See port cloning cluster management 300 and switch passwords 305 cluster manager 300 305 cluster member 300 305 cluster member firmware upgrade 303 network example 301 XS3900 48F User s Guide E Index setup 304 specification 300 status 301 switch models 300 VID 305 web configurator 302 cluster manager 300 cluster member 300 command interface 23 Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST 109 Common and Internal Spanning Tree See CIST 111 configuration 255 change running config 270 configuration file 59 backup 272 restore 59 272 saving 270 configuration saving 59 copying port settings See port cloning copyright 321 CPU management port 95 CPU protection configuration 245 overview 244 current date 73 current time 73 D dacl0g 79 Data Center Bridging DCB 17 19 DCBX 20 ETS 19 PFC 18 20 daylight saving t
379. tion request to a RADIUS server The RADIUS server validates whether this client is allowed access to the port Figure 69 EEE 802 1x Authentication Process b m E m New Connection Identity Request Login Credentials Q Authentication Request Challenge Request Challenge Response Access Challenge Access Request Authentication Reply Session Granted Denied 16 1 2 MAC Authentication MAC authentication works in a very similar way to IEEE 802 1x authentication The main difference is that the Switch does not prompt the client for login credentials The login credentials are based XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication on the source MAC address of the client connecting to a port on the Switch along with a password configured specifically for MAC authentication on the Switch Figure 70 MAC Authentication Process lt gt New Connection Authentication Request Authentication Reply Session Granted Denied 16 2 Port Authentication Configuration To enable port authentication first activate the port authentication method s you want to use both on the Switch and the port s then configure the RADIUS server settings in the AAA gt Radius Server Setup screen To activate a port authentication method click Advanced Application gt Port Authentication in the navigation panel Select a port authentication method in the screen that ap
380. to point topology Both PAgP and UDLD are Cisco s proprietary data link layer protocols PAgP is similar to LACP and used to set up a logical aggregation of Ethernet ports automatically UDLD is to determine the link s physical status and detect a unidirectional link PAGP Select this option to have the Switch send PAgP packets to a peer to automatically negotiate and build a logical port aggregation LACP Select this option to have the Switch send LACP packets to a peer to dynamically creates and manages trunk groups UDLD Select this option to have the Switch send UDLD packets to a peer s port it connected to monitor the physical status of a link Mode Select Access to have the Switch encapsulate the incoming layer 2 protocol packets and forward them to the tunnel port s Select Access for ingress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Note You can enable L2PT services for STP LACP VTP CDP UDLD and PAGP on the access port s only Select Tunnel for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network The Switch decapsulates the encapsulated layer 2 protocol packets received on a tunnel port by changing the destination MAC address to the original one and then forward them to an access port If the service s is not enabled on an access port the protocol packets are dropped Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is tu
381. ttings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Control Select Normal for the port to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP This is the default selection Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN Group ID Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Click the number to edit the VLAN settings Active Name This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled Yes or disabled No This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group VLAN Type This field displays the Normal or Private Primary Isolated or Community type VLAN configured in the top part of this screen Association VLAN List This field displays which secondary private VLANs are associated with a primar
382. ty Ov Add Cancel Index Active Port Name Ethernet type VID Priority Delete Cancer The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate this protocol based VLAN Port Type a port number to be included in this protocol based VLAN This port must belong to a static VLAN in order to participate in a protocol based VLAN See Chapter 7 on page 81 for more details on setting up VLANs Name Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters to identify this protocol based VLAN XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 7 VLAN Table 25 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Ethernet type Use the drop down list box to select a predefined protocol to be included in this protocol based VLAN or select Others and type the protocol number in hexadecimal notation For example the IP protocol in hexadecimal notation is 0800 and Novell IPX protocol is 8137 Note Protocols in the hexadecimal number range of 0x0000 to OxO5ff are not allowed to be used for protocol based VLANs VID Enter the ID of a VLAN to which the port belongs This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the Advanced Applications gt VLAN screens Priority Select the priority level that the Switch will assign to fra
383. ulticast VLAN in the MVR screen you can only specify up to 15 VLANs in this screen The Switch drops any IGMP control messages which do not belong to these 16 VLANs Note You must also enable IGMP snooping in the Multicast Setting screen first Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN Use this section of the screen to add VLANs upon which the Switch is to perform IGMP snooping Name Enter the descriptive name of the VLAN for identification purposes VID Enter the ID of a static VLAN the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Note You cannot configure the same VLAN ID as in the MVR screen XS3900 48F User s Guide 177 Chapter 22 Multicast Table 69 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click
384. uplex use if peer is set at 40Gbps full duplex Flow Control A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory causing frame discards and frame losses Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port The Switch uses IEEE 802 3x flow control in full duplex mode and backpressure flow control in half duplex mode IEEE 802 3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending port causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers fill Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a collision signal to the sending port mimicking a state of frame collision causing the sending port to temporarily stop sending signals and resend later Select Flow Control to enable it 802 1p Priority This priority value is added to incoming frames without a 802 1p priority queue tag See Priority Queue Assignment in Table 15 on page 74 for more information BPDU Control Configure the way to treat BPDUs received on this port You must activate bridging control protocol transparency in the Switch Setup screen first Select Peer to process any BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units received on this port Select Tunnel to forward BPDUs received on this port Select Discard to drop any BPDU received on this port Select Network to process a BPDU with no VLAN tag
385. ure on this port Clients that fail authentication are placed in the guest VLAN and can receive limited services Guest Vlan A guest VLAN is a pre configured VLAN on the Switch that allows non authenticated users to access limited network resources through the Switch You must also enable IEEE 802 1x authentication on the Switch and the associated ports Enter the number that identifies the guest VLAN Make sure this is a VLAN recognized in your network XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication Table 50 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x gt Guest VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Host mode Specify how the Switch authenticates users when more than one user connect to the port using a hub Select Multi Host to authenticate only the first user that connects to this port If the first user enters the correct credential any other users are allowed to access the port without authentication If the first user fails to enter the correct credential they are all put in the guest VLAN Once the first user who did authentication logs out or disconnects from the port rest of the users are blocked until a user does the authentication process again Select Multi Secure to authenticate each user that connects to this port Multi Secure If you set Host mode to Multi Secure specify the maximum number of users between Num 1 and 24 that the Switch will authenticate on this port Apply
386. ut of profile action C Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Metering Bandwidth Out of Profile DSCP XS3900 48F User s Guide Queuing Method This chapter introduces the queuing methods supported 20 1 Queuing Method Overview Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion Use the Queuing Method screen to configure queuing algorithms for outgoing traffic See also Priority Queue Assignment in Switch Setup and 802 1p Priority in Port Setup for related information Queuing algorithms allow switches to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth 20 1 1 Strictly Priority Queuing Strictly Priority Queuing SPQ services queues based on priority only As traffic comes into the Switch traffic on the highest priority queue Q7 is transmitted first When that queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue Q6 is transmitted until Q6 empties and then traffic is transmitted on Q5 and so on If higher priority queues never empty then traffic on lower priority queues never gets sent SP does not automatically adapt to changing network requirements 20 1 2 Weighted Fair Queuing Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue s minimum bandwidth based on its bandwidth weight the number you configure in the Weight field when there is traffic congestion
387. v network consisting of a group of directly connected DiffServ compliant network devices The boundary node A in Figure 147 in a DiffServ network classifies marks with a DSCP value the incoming packets into different traffic flows Platinum Gold Silver Bronze based on the configured marking rules A network administrator can then apply XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 33 Differentiated Services various traffic policies to the traffic flows For example one traffic policy would be to give higher drop precedence to one traffic flow over others In our example packets in the Bronze traffic flow are more likely to be dropped when congestion occurs than the packets in the Platinum traffic flow as they move across the DiffServ network Figure 147 DiffServ Network P Platinum G Gold S Silver B Bronze 33 2 Two Rate Three Color Marker Traffic Policing Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the basis of user defined criteria Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user defined criteria and identify it as either conforming exceeding or violating the criteria Two Rate Three Color Marker TRTCM defined in RFC 2698 is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to two user defined rates the Committed Information Rate CIR and the Peak Information Rate PIR The CIR specifies the average rate at which packets a
388. vate VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Private VLAN These fields show information for the all private VLANs See also Advanced Application gt Status Private VLAN Primary This field shows the primary VLAN ID in a private VLAN VLAN Secondary This field shows the secondary VLAN ID in a private VLAN VLAN Type This field shows the type of private VLAN Primary Community or Isolated Port List This shows the ports mapped to the private VLAN using the Advanced Application gt Private VLAN or Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN screen Change Pages Use the Previous and Next buttons to display different pages 7 6 Port based VLAN Setup Port based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC address and its associated port Port based VLANs require allowed outgoing ports to be defined for each port Therefore if you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other for example between conference rooms in a hotel you must define the egress an egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves for both ports Port based VLANs are specific only to the Switch on which they were created Note When you activate port based VLAN the Switch uses a default VLAN ID of 1 You cannot change it Note In screens such as IP Setup and Filtering that require a VID you must enter 1 as the VID The port based VLAN setup screen
389. ver Select tacacs to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured via the TACACS Server Authorization Use this section to configure authorization settings on the Switch Type Set whether the Switch provides the following services to a user Exec Allow an administrator which logs in the Switch through Telnet or SSH to have different access privilege level assigned via the external server e Dotlx Allow an IEEE 802 1x client to have different bandwidth limit or VLAN ID assigned via the external server Active Select this to activate authorization for a specified event types Method Select whether you want to use RADIUS or TACACS for authorization of specific types of events RADIUS is the only method for IEEE 802 1x authorization Accounting Use this section to configure accounting settings on the Switch Update Period This is the amount of time in minutes before the Switch sends an update to the accounting server This is only valid if you select the start stop option for the Exec or Dot1x entries Type The Switch supports the following types of events to be sent to the accounting server s System Configure the Switch to send information when the following system events occur system boots up system shuts down system accounting is enabled system accounting is disabled e Exec Configure the Switch to send information when an administrator logs in and lo
390. wo VLANs VIDs 1 and 2 for a campus network Two DHCP servers are installed to serve each VLAN The system is set up to forward DHCP requests from the dormitory rooms VLAN 1 to the DHCP server with an IP address of 192 168 1 100 Requests from XS3900 48F User s Guide 267 Chapter 34 DHCP the academic buildings VLAN 2 are sent to the other DHCP server with an IP address of 172 23 10 100 Figure 158 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs DHCP 192 168 1 100 For the example network configure the VLAN Setting screen as shown Figure 159 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs Configuration Example ED VLAN Setting g VID Remote DHCP Server 1 Remote DHCP Server 2 Remote DHCP Server 3 Relay Agent Information Information Status 2 172 23 10 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Option 82 XS3900 Add Cancel Clear VID Type 1 Relay DHCP Status Delete 192 168 1 100 7 Delete Cancel XS3900 48F User s Guide This chapter explains how to configure the maintenance screens that let you maintain the firmware Maintenance and configuration files 35 1 The Maintenance Screen Use this screen to manage firmware and your configuration files Click Management gt Maintenance in the navigation panel to open the following screen Figure 160 Management gt Maintenance Current Configuration 1 a LANE Firmware Upgrade Click Here Restore Configuration Click Here Backup Configuration Click Her
391. x number Click on an index number to view more VLAN details This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch Dynamic using GVRP Static manually added as a normal entry Private manually added as a private VLAN primary isolated or community MVR added via Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Change Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous next screen if all status information cannot be seen in one screen XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 7 VLAN 7 5 2 VLAN Details Use this screen to view detailed port settings and status of the VLAN group See Section 7 1 on page 81 for more information on static 802 1Q VLAN Click on an index number in the VLAN Status screen to display VLAN details Figure 30 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail XESS VLAN Status Port Number z VD 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 dn Status 1357 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 icc ne Sl lee le eae EGER le le EE ES ES IE ELE ERA E emn Lin A Lia See Primary VLAN Secondary VLAN Type Port List 50 Primary 50 51 Community 50 53 Community Change Pages Previous Nex The fol
392. y efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues and returns to queues that have not yet emptied 20 2 Configuring Queuing Click Advanced Application gt Queuing Method in the navigation panel Figure 84 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method OFTEN Port Method Weight Hybrid SPQ Unicast Weight eee Qo Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Lowest Queue Weight E SPQ y y e SPQ 1 wa 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 None v 1 1 WRR e SPQ 2 WFQ 1 2 3 EH 5 6 7 8 None v 1 1 WRR e SPQ 3 wa 1 2 3 H 5 6 7 8 None v 1 1 WRR e SPQ 4 wa 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 None v 1 1 WRR o SPQ 5 wra 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 None y 1 1 WRR e SPQ 6 WFQ 1 2 3 5 6 i 8 None v 1 1 WRR e SPQ T wra 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 None y 1 1 WRR e SPQ 8 WFQ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 None y 1 1 sanen CMRR B S n Apply Cancel XS3900 48F User s Guide 163 Chapter 20 Queuing Method The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This label shows the port you are configuring T Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Method Select SPQ Strictly Priority Queuing WFQ Weighted Fair
393. y private VLAN configured in the top part of this screen Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XS3900 48F User s Guide 87 Chapter 7 VLAN 7 5 4 Configure VLAN Port Settings Use the VLAN Port Setting screen to configure the static VLAN IEEE 802 1Q settings on a port See Section 7 1 on page 81 for more information on 802 1Q VLAN Click the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen Figure 32 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting GVRP Port Ingress Check OO d o A WN PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation A 1 Al X 1 Al Y 1 Al E 1 Al Y 1 Al g 1 Al X 1 Al X 1 A Y 1 Al X 1 Al X PEPE LE PELE LS Dp 4 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 23 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Select this check box to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjust
394. ynamically through GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes for the TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes for the TCI Tag Control Information starting after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and the value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible number of VLAN configurations is 4 094 TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 bits 7 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames Each port on the Switch is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN
395. ys Yes when the static route is activated and No when it is deactivated XS3900 48F User s Guide Chapter 32 Static Route Table 116 P Application gt Static Routing continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field displays the descriptive name for this route This is for identification purposes only Destination This field displays the IP network address of the final destination Address Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask for this destination Gateway This field displays the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate Address neighbor of your Switch that will forward the packet to the destination Metric This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XS3900 48F User s Guide Differentiated Services This chapter shows you how to configure Differentiated Services DiffServ on the Switch 33 1 DiffServ Overview Quality of Service QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the flow are given the same priority You can use CoS class of service to give different priorities to different packet types DiffServ is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the ap
396. ys the maximum voltage measured at this point MIN This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point Threshold This field displays the percentage tolerance of the voltage with which the Switch still works Status Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point otherwise Error is displayed XS3900 48F User s Guide T1 Chapter 6 Basic Setting 6 3 General Setup 72 Use this screen to configure general settings such as the system name and time Click Basic Setting and General Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 23 Basic S etting gt General Setup System Name Location Contact Person s Nam Use Time Server when Bo Time Server IP Addres Current Time New Time hh mm ss Current Date Time Zone Daylight Saving Time Start Date End Date General Setup New Date yyyy mm dd 1970 01 01 It will take 60 seconds if time server is unreachable otup None v s 0 0 0 0 03 116 1 07 uTc Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 Basic Se tting gt General Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name Type a descriptive name for identification purposes This name consists of up to 64 printable characters spaces are allowed Location Type the geographic location of your Switch You can use up to 32 printable

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

AB7645 User Manual - Support  Recrutement mode d`emploi - Mission Locale de Moulins  fulltext - DiVA Portal  Samsung Galaxy NotePRO 12.2  Guide d`installation  IF-100  Tag16 取扱説明書 - 株式会社マトリックス  Manual de instalación y mantenimiento Ionizador tipo    WP Reparación  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file